Technical Interview Questions 2024 https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/interview-questions/ Mon, 28 Apr 2025 13:28:12 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.6.2 https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/cropped-wscube-tech-logo-svg-1-32x32.png Technical Interview Questions 2024 https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/interview-questions/ 32 32 Top 78 Content Writing Interview Questions And Answers In 2025 (With PDF) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/content-writing-interview-questions-answers/ https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/content-writing-interview-questions-answers/#respond Thu, 17 Oct 2024 12:43:12 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=1601 Worried about your upcoming content writing job interview? Fear no more! We have your back with the most asked content writing interview questions and answers, along with some crucial tips to ace the interview. Whether you are a fresher or an experienced content writer, cracking the job interview is a crucial process to landing the...

The post Top 78 Content Writing Interview Questions And Answers In 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
Worried about your upcoming content writing job interview? Fear no more! We have your back with the most asked content writing interview questions and answers, along with some crucial tips to ace the interview.

Whether you are a fresher or an experienced content writer, cracking the job interview is a crucial process to landing the job you want to pursue. 

In this write-up, we have covered the most common content writer interview questions for freshers, experienced, as well as SEO Content Writers. You will also find proper guidance on how to become a content writer, the skills required, and much more.

Basic Content Writing Interview Questions for Freshers & Interns (2025)

If you are an absolute beginner, then the first thing to do is know the basics and fundamentals of this skill. To help you with this, here are some of the top content writer interview questions and answers for freshers. You can also go through these even if you are appearing for an internship opportunity. 

1. What is content writing?

Content writing is a skill that requires you to write different forms of content, especially for the purpose of digital marketing. 

It can be the captions that you read on social media posts, articles that you read on blogs, the content on web pages, landing pages, product descriptions on eCommerce websites, etc.

what is content writing for freshers

2. What is the role and importance of content writing?

Below is a list of the primary roles and benefits of content writing:

  • The most effective way to get your business in the digital sphere.
  • A communication channel to reach customers.
  • Audience engagement and retention.
  • Providing information.
  • Boost SEO.
  • Cater to newspapers and magazines.
  • Establish credibility and validation.
  • Creating books

3. What is web content?

The content written for a website’s pages is called web content or website content. For example, the content on the homepage, service/product pages, about company page, etc. are examples of web content.

The purpose of web content writing is to provide audience information about the company, its products & services, benefits & features, specifications, and much more. The main motive of web content is to bring the audience to the website and convert them into customers. 

This is among the top web content writer interview questions for freshers. Hence, you must know its answer and should be able to explain with an example. 

Suggested Reading: 30+ Most Asked Digital Marketing Interview Questions & Answers

4. What are landing pages?

It is a type of web page where the audience lands from paid ad campaigns, email marketing campaigns, or other sources. 

It is called a landing page because this is where the audience lands by clicking the link through an ad or other digital marketing campaigns.

Landing pages are generally targeted for a specific product or service, with the core purpose of conversion. Here, mostly the focus is on copywriting over SEO. Trust signals, scarcity, urgency, and other similar factors are taken care of on a landing page to boost conversions.

5. What are the different types of content?

The different forms of content include:

  • Article and blog posts
  • Web content
  • Copywriting
  • Social media content
  • SEO content 
  • eBooks
  • Press releases
  • Professional emails
  • News writing

6. Do you know about any content management systems?

There are several content management systems (CMS), like WordPress, Joomla, Drupal, Magento, etc. However, I have worked only on WordPress.

7. What is the difference between content writing and copywriting?

The difference between copywriting and content writing lies in the purpose. The core purpose of content writing is to offer information, instructions, or educate the audience. 

On the other hand, copywriting is done primarily to drive sales for the business. It is like a salesperson writing content. 

While content writing can also help in driving sales, but it is not the primary motive. Copywriting is more persuasive than content writing. 

Examples of Content Writing

  • Blog posts
  • News writing
  • Tutorials
  • eBooks
  • Newsletters
  • Press release

Examples of Copywriting

  • Landing page
  • Ad copies for PPC campaigns, and social media campaigns
  • Product pages
  • Sales emails
  • Website sales copy

8. What is the difference between content writing and creative writing?

There are several differences between creative writing and content writing, as shown below:

Content WritingCreative Writing
It is factualFictional, non-fictional, and lyrical
Informational, instructional, and persuasiveEntertaining, expression of thoughts and feelings
For a targeted audienceFor masses, or general audience
Follows the content and marketing strategyFreestyle writing
Example: Website content, product descriptions, blogs, ad copies, etc.Example: Poetry, novel, song lyrics, movie scripts, etc.

9. What is editing? Explain in simple terms.

Editing is the art of enhancing the quality of the content by working on its organization, grammar, presentation, and ensuring that the context of the content is conveyed in the best possible manner.

In editing, the parts of the content may be removed, rewritten, or added. It is a crucial part of content writing and a crucial skill that every content writer should have.

10. What is proofreading?

Proofreading is the process of corrective misspellings, typing errors, punctuations, and other surface issues in a piece of content. 

The proofreading skills require command over the language in which the content is written. Its purpose is to give the final touch to the content before proceeding with it for publishing.

11. Why did you choose to become a content writer?

This is among the most common content writing interview questions for freshers. You need to answer it well by explaining the reasons behind choosing to build a career in content writing.

For example, you can say that writing is something that you enjoy or you are passionate about. 

12. Do you read books? What are some of your favorites?

Usually, people who have an interest in writing tend to have an interest in reading as well. If you are one of this sort and are asked about your favorite books or authors, mention the top books and writers that you love to read.

This is one of the top content writing interview questions for freshers. The good thing about it is that you can answer it without preparation. 

13. What is plagiarism in content writing?

When you present someone else’s content or work as your own, it is called plagiarism. In content writing, copying a piece of content and using it in your own content is considered plagiarism. 

The following can be counted as plagiarism in content writing:

  • Using someone’s content without proper credit
  • Using ideas of other people and presenting them as your own
  • Copying content from other websites and using it on your website
  • Sharing wrong or misleading information about the source of a quotation
  • Not giving proper credit to the data/information to the original sources
  • Using someone’s else quotations without giving credit 

14. Which are the free plagiarism checker tools?

Some of the best tools to check plagiarism for free are:

  • Duplichecker
  • Small SEO Tools
  • Quetext
  • Plagiarism Detector

15. What is content spinning? Why you must avoid it?

The process of using automatic content generation tools to create a second copy of the content is called content spinning. Here, the tools change certain words with their synonyms or alternate words and generate new content.

Content spinning can also be done manually if a person rewrites a piece of content by simply changing the words in a piece of content with their synonyms. 

16. What is freelance writing?

Freelance writing or freelance content writing is a profession where a content writer works with clients on a contract basis. In this case, the content writer finds the projects on his own, decides the rates with the client, and works on the projects without working as a full-time employee.

A freelance writer doesn’t have any fixed working hours like a job. He/she can choose to work anytime or anywhere, but the end goal is to meet deadlines and deliver the projects on expected timelines. 

Moreover, the salary of a freelance content writer is not fixed. He/she can earn according to the rates offered to clients, the amount of work done, etc. 

17. What is Grammarly? Have you used it?

Grammarly is one of the most popular content writing tools that help in creating error-free content. It is an AI-based writing assistant. Grammarly is the preferred choice of content writers because it shows corrections, suggestions, etc. related to grammar, spellings, word choices, sentence structure, and more. 

The free version of Grammarly checks for:

  • Grammar 
  • Spellings
  • Punctuation
  • Word count

18. What is the difference between Grammarly Free vs Premium?

The core differences between Grammarly’s free and premium versions are that the latter allows you to check plagiarism and offers advanced grammar suggestions.

Here is the tabular comparison between Grammarly Free vs Premium

Free FeaturesPremium Features
Basic grammar checkChecks for in-depth grammatical errors
Detects spelling mistakesSuggestions for clarity and readability improvement
Detects punctuation errorsSentence structure editing
Shows grammar scoreCustomize the tone and set goals

Plagiarism Checker for up to 100K characters in one-go

Customer Support

Support

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

Digital Marketing Interview QuestionsSEO Interview Questions
Email Marketing Interview QuestionsContent Writing Interview Questions

Advanced Content Writing Interview Questions and Answers for Experienced

If you have some experience as a content writer, whether in a full-time job or as a freelance, you must be prepared for the following content writing interview questions for experienced. Also, go through the above questions as well for solid preparation.

1. What are the main qualities of good content?

Below is a list of the top qualities of good content writing:

  • Engaging
  • Offers value 
  • Authentic and credible
  • Comprehensive
  • Includes CTA
  • Uniqueness
  • Optimized for SEO

2. How to decide the tone of content?

For deciding the tone of the content we are writing, the first thing to do is know exactly who is going to read that content. In simple terms, we need to understand who is the target audience for a particular article, web page, eBook, case study, etc.

When you know the audience, you can understand the level of their understanding, words they are familiar with, their age group, etc. On the basis of that, we decide the content tone, whether to keep it formal, casual, or semi-formal. 

For example, if the audience of my content is entrepreneurs, it is better to keep the tone formal and professional. 

Another important thing to take care of while deciding the tone of the content is to know about your brand values. 

3. What can you do to make your content look more authentic?

The internet is full of oceans of content. To stand out from the competition and make an impact, you must create authentic content in a consistent manner.

Here are some quick tips to write authentic content:

  • Understand the target audience of the content you are writing. Know their expectations from your content, what you can do to meet their intent, etc. 
  • Write in an interactive manner while showcasing your expertise in the field.
  • The tone of the content should sound confident to win the audience’s trust.
  • Respond to comments on the posts.
  • Use relevant statistics in the content from trusted sources.
  • Follow white-hat SEO practices.
  • Use tools like Grammarly to write error-free content. Common grammatical mistakes can lead to losing the audience’s trust.
  • Perform thorough research before writing a piece of content. You can also include unique quotes from experts in your field.
  • Include visual elements in the form of graphs, screenshots, or infographics.
  • Use a fresh perspective on the topic. 
  • Ensure that your content is completely original. 

4. Being a content writer, what are the things that you enjoy the most?

Content writing is a skill-based job. Most of the people choose to build a career in content writing because they enjoy the art of writing.

However, once you are in this profession, you need to write on a wide variety of topics. If you enjoy this part of the job, you can mention that you love to explore new topics. Content writing provides you with the opportunity to work on a broad range of topics. 

Furthermore, the role of writing content is to offer information and educate users. If this is something you love about the content writing job, do respond accordingly to such B2B content writer interview questions. 

5. Have you created the blog and content plan for a website?

This is one of the most asked content writing interview questions for experienced writers. If you have worked for multiple organizations or clients, you might have got the chance to create a blog plan or other content plan. 

If you have crafted the blog strategy for a website, mention the site and what were the core elements of your strategy, etc. In case you didn’t get the opportunity to create a content plan, you can simply say no. 

6. What are the different types of blog posts?

There are several types of articles or blog posts in content writing, including:

a) List articles

Examples

  • Top 10 Free SEO Tools
  • 15 Best WordPress Themes
  • Top 20 Benefits of Reading Books
  • 36 Most Famous Tourists Attractions in Rajasthan

b) How To Guides

Examples:

  • Full Guide on How to Lose Weight Fast?
  • How to Make Pizza At Home?
  • How to Download Instagram Reels?

c) Infographics

Graphic-based articles or guides

Example:

The State of SEO in 2021 [Infographic]

d) Interview Articles

Example:

Without digital marketing, a website or app is as good as a brochure. – Kushagra Bhatia

e) Guest Posts

Articles contributed on a blog or site as a guest author or contributor.

f) Newsjacking Articles

Articles written to take advantage of trending news stories or events for promoting the business and its services/products.

g) Pillar Content

A comprehensive and detailed piece of content with subtopics having the scope of getting broken into individual topics. 

h) Personal Stories

Examples:

  • My YouTube Journey From 0 to 20 Million Subscribers
  • Aamir Khan Life and Success Story 

7. What are infographics and why are they important?

An infographic stands for information graphic. As the name suggests, it is a graphical or visual presentation of information. 

In infographics, we can include pieces of content, charts, graphs, images, etc., and present the content in a visually-appealing manner.

These play a crucial role in content marketing because infographics are easy-to-understand and engaging. Users are more likely to consume the content on it compared to simple plain text content. 

8. What is the difference between editing and proofreading?

There are a number of differences between proofreading and editing. When such content writer interview questions are asked, explain the differences in simple terms so that the interviewer can be sure that you actually understand both things.

Here is a quick list comparison between editing vs proofreading:

EditingProofreading
Performed on the first draft of the contentPerformed once editing is done
Fixing core issuesFixing surface issues
May decrease/increase the word count of the contentUsually doesn’t hamper the word count much
Improves overall quality of the contentMakes good content error-free
Longer turnaround time Shorter turnaround time

9. How to edit and proofread your content?

Here are some of the best proofreading and editing tips for content writers:

  • Understand the overall purpose of the content
  • Edit before proofreading
  • Take a pause after writing a piece of content, and then start editing
  • Read slow and read every word
  • Read the content backward
  • Proofread out aloud
  • Keep sentences shorter (max 20 words)
  • Keep paragraphs shorter (max 4-5 sentences)
  • Check that all verb tenses are consistent in the content
  • Read the content at least 5 times
  • Give a dedicated reading slot for checking punctuation

10. What is the importance of readability in content writing?

Readability helps in presenting the content in the most efficient manner to the audience. The better the content readability, the clearly you can convey your message, ideas, or offer information. 

Here is a list of quick reasons why readability is important:

  • Making content clear
  • Making content easy to understand
  • Boost SEO
  • Make the audience actually read the content
  • Better content engagement

11. How to improve the readability of content? Share some tips that you follow.

These are some of the best tips to improve content readability:

  • Use easy and familiar words in the content
  • Keep sentences and paragraphs short
  • Break up the content with headings, subheadings, and bullet points
  • Keep the audience in mind while writing (their level of understanding, words they’re familiar with, etc.)
  • Use visual elements (images, graphics, screenshots, videos, etc.)
  • Make use of transition words for better writing flow
  • Take help of editing and proofreading tools like Grammarly and Hemingway

12. How many years of experience do you have in content writing?

You must be prepared for this type of content writing interview questions for experienced. Whether you have 1 year of experience or 5 years of experience, this question is usually asked in the job interview. 

Here, you will obviously mention the number of years. But you should also talk about the companies you have worked for, your core niches, and the types of content. 

13. Please share some web content writing tips that you follow to curate better content.

I follow these tips to write excellent web content:

  • Focus on benefits over features
  • Persuade the audience to act
  • Use targeted keywords
  • Write short sentences
  • Follow the inverted pyramid approach 
  • Write the majority of content in active voice
  • Avoid weak words
  • Keep the content concise and clear

14. What is an inverted pyramid in content writing?

The inverted pyramid style in content writing is a technique used to prioritize the most important information in the content and structure the content accordingly.

This approach follows an upside-down structure, where the top section on a page includes the most important information, the next section includes the second-most important content, and the last section includes the least important information.

The inverted pyramid approach works great in content writing as it grabs the interest of the users when they start at the top. Then it brings them down to consume more content. 

inverted pyramid approach in content writing

15. What was your role in the last company?

In such content writing interview questions for experienced, share exactly what were your tasks and related to which niche. 

For example, you can say that you worked on the company’s monthly blog posts, web content, social media captions, weekly newsletters, etc. You can elaborate on the answer as per your experience and roles in the previous organization.

16. Whom do you follow to improve your content writing skills?

The answer to this question varies for every person. However, you can mention anyone who you follow for content writing tips, suggestions, trends, and more.

For example, I follow Copyblogger to improve my content writing skills. 

17. How many words can you write per day?

There is no fixed number of words that a content writer can write on a daily basis. It is because it depends on the niche, topic, and amount of research required. 

For example, a technical topic will need more time compared to a simple topic on solo travel tips.

Moreover, every writer has his/her own capabilities and skill levels. On average, around 2000-2500 words can be written daily if at least 8 hours of work is done. 

18. What are your key strengths as a content writer?

In this type of interview questions on content writing, talk about your core strengths as a writer. Not all content writers have the same strengths. So, you need to identify what your strengths are.

For example, you can mention that you meet deadlines, perform thorough research on the topic before writing, or have the ability to switch between different forms of content. 

19. What is a newsjacking article?

The newsjacking articles are written to take advantage of trending news stories or events for promoting the business and its services/products.

For example, in 2021, a new ransomware attack called the JBS attack majorly impacted the businesses across supply chain businesses in the US and Australia. It was a trending news story and event. 

A cybersecurity firm named Acronis covered an article related to this attack and offered in-depth information related to it. Eventually, it promoted its cyber protection solutions to avoid such ransomware attacks. This newsjacking article was a great move by Acronis to bring the targeted audience to the site and pitch them the product they need. 

20. From where do you find free images for your articles? Name top 5 websites.

Some of the top free websites for stock-free images are:

  • Freepik
  • Unsplash
  • Pixabay
  • Pexels
  • Burst

21. How much plagiarism is allowed in content?

The content we publish must be 100% unique. While there are some exceptions where tools may show plagiarism but it is okay to skip it. But content writers must know what can be avoided.

For example, proverbs and idioms can be used without worrying about plagiarism. Common knowledge like “Sachin Tendulkar is called the God of cricket”, etc. will not be counted in plagiarism, even if the tools show it is plagiarised. So, one must have an idea of what can be ignored and what can not. 

22. What are the different types of plagiarism in content writing?

There are three types of plagiarism that we need to avoid while writing content:

a) Content Spinning

It is the process of using automated tools or content spinning tools to generate a second copy of unique content. Moreover, if you copy the content of others and manually rewrite it by just changing some words and using synonyms is also content spinning.

b) Content Scraping

When the majority of your content is copied from other websites, it is called content scraping. 

c) Unintentional Plagiarism

When you write a piece of content on your own without copying anything from other sites, but some sentences or part of the content matches with other sites, it can lead to unintentional plagiarism. To avoid it, you must use plagiarism checker tools.

23. Which premium plagiarism checking tools have you used?

Some of the most popular premium plagiarism checking tools include Copyscape, Grammarly, UniCheck, ProWritingAid, and Quetext.

In such content writing interview questions for experienced, you should mention the tools you have actually used. Generally, companies or individuals opt for Grammarly or Copyscape.

24. What can be the consequences of plagiarism in content?

Content plagiarism can lead to the following issues or consequences:

  • Copyright issues
  • Loss of website ranking
  • Penalties from Google
  • No AdSense Approval
  • Loss of clients
  • Loss of reputation

25. What are some good tips to avoid plagiarism in content writing?

Here is a quick list of tips to avoid content plagiarism:

  • Never think of copy-pasting from other sites
  • Write and present the content in your own words
  • Note down the points during research and close the tabs/windows in the browser once done
  • Never think of content spinning
  • While using quotes from others, make sure to use quotation marks and give credit to the source
  • Use reliable plagiarism checker tools to ensure that the content is 100% unique.

26. What are some of the best content research tips?

Usually, I follow these tips for content research to create authentic and high-value content:

  1. Make the most out of Google Autocomplete suggestions
  2. Check the ‘Related Searches’ section on Google’s search engine results page (SERP)
  3. Go through the top results of competitors to understand the topic and how you can write better than them
  4. Find relevant data by searching for research reports and statistics
  5. Use Quora to find answers from experts
  6. Browse YouTube videos of experts

27. Why you should write catchy headlines?

There are several benefits of writing interesting and catchy headlines:

  • More clicks in SERP
  • Increased website traffic
  • More clicks on social media
  • Social media shares
  • Better CTR (click-through rate)
  • Better Email Marketing Results

28. Please share some awesome tips to write catchy headlines?

Here are a number of crucial tips to write better headlines:

  • Use numbers and stats in the headline
  • Keep the headline accurate and specific
  • Use powerful words to evoke emotions and curiosity
  • Show scarcity
  • Write 5+ headlines and finalize one.

29. What tips do you follow to write better product descriptions?

I follow these product description writing tips:

  • Understand the audience of the specific product
  • Know the most valuable features of the product to highlight
  • Write a descriptive headline
  • Include product benefits in the introduction
  • Use natural language and tone
  • Use words familiar to the product users
  • Include power words to drive sales
  • Create bullet points list of features and benefits
  • Optimize it for SEO by including keywords in the headline, body content, and subheadings

30. What are the most common content writing mistakes?

Following is a quick list of content writing mistakes that are so common:

  • Not double-checking the content after writing
  • Taking images directly from search results
  • Not understanding SEO
  • Not Conducting Thorough Research
  • Obvious advertising in content
  • Pointless word count
  • Not checking plagiarism
  • Ignoring CTA
  • Not deciding on a niche for career
  • Not keeping up with latest trends in SEO and digital marketing

31. Have you worked as a freelance content writer? If yes, please share your experience.

In such content writing interview questions, you need to answer according to your experience. If you have worked on freelance projects, talk about the type of work and niche, client, etc.

In case you have not worked as a freelance writer, then you can simply say that you haven’t done it.

32. What are the top freelancing writing websites or platforms?

The best websites to find freelance writing work include:

  • Upwork
  • Freelancer
  • Fiverr
  • Flexjobs
  • ProBlogger
  • LinkedIn 

33. What is ghostwriting? 

It is the process of writing content that is published under someone else’s name. Here, the writer doesn’t get the credit for the work. 

For example, a writer can work on a complete book for an entrepreneur, life coach, business owner, or literally anyone who has the story of content, but not the writing skills. The writer here will not get his name on the book. So, he is a ghostwriter. 

34. What is technical writing?

The process of writing straightforward and easy-to-understand content by simplifying the complex things or content is called technical writing. 

Here, the role of a technical writer is to understand the context of complex or technical content and present it in simple words to the end users or target audience.

35. Why should we hire you for content writing job?

Among the frequently asked interview questions in content writers, you must be able to answer trickily to ‘why should we hire you?’

You can say:

“Content writing is something that I enjoy doing and am passionate about. I understand the importance of good content on websites and blogs. I have the skills to curate high-quality and research-based content related to given topics. Also, I am a good team player. Working in this organization will help me bring out the best of me while working on the growth aspect of the company.”

36. What according to you are the skills required to become a technical writer?

A technical writer must have the following skills:

  • Research
  • Communication skills (to coordinate with technical teams)
  • Audience analysis
  • Technical skills or knowledge of the field
  • Familiarity with technical writing tools

37. What are the best content writing tools?

The top tools for content writing include:

i) Grammarly

For writing error-free content (grammar suggestions)

ii) Hemingway

For content editing recommendations

iii) Google Docs

An online tool for productive writing, with options to share the document by links and manage access

iv) MS Word

The most common writing tool and editor

v) Ubersuggest

For keyword research and SEO

vi) Answer The Public

To find long-tail keywords and questions for voice SEO

vii) Duplichecker

An online tool to check plagiarism for free

viii) Small SEO Tools

Free online tool for plagiarism check

ix) Word Counter

It’s more than what its name says. The tool offers grammar & spell check, goal setting, thesaurus, and more.

x) Yoast SEO

Must-use WordPress plugin for bloggers and writers to improve content SEO and readability.

xi) Canva

For basic graphic design to create featured images, editing screenshots & images used within content

xii)Nimbus

Most efficient Chrome extension to capture screenshots

SEO Content Writing Interview Questions and Answers

For those preparing for a job role with SEO skills, you will be asked several important questions related to search engine optimization. But worry not, we have also covered the top SEO Content Writer interview questions and answers here. 

1. What is SEO Content Writing?

It is the process of writing content for both the users and the search engines like Google and Bing. 

To be precise, SEO Content is high-quality content written with SEO practices. For this, the writer should have basic knowledge of keywords, heading tags, meta titles and descriptions, and other common on-page SEO ranking factors. 

seo content writing interview questions

2. How to optimize content for SEO?

To write SEO-friendly content that can rank on Google’s top results, we must follow the below things:

  • Find and finalize the right keywords
  • Write SEO-optimized meta title and description
  • Write an interesting introduction and include the primary keyword in the first 100 words
  • Structure the content with proper heading tags (H1, H2, H3, etc.)
  • Try to use keywords in headings but in a natural manner
  • Use the keywords in the content
  • All keywords must be used naturally
  • Images used must be optimized (compressed images, image title, alt tag, etc.)
  • The content written must be unique
  • Take care of strategic internal and external linking

3. What are keywords and what role do they play in content?

Keywords are the queries of the people searched on Google and other search engines. These are what people search for while looking for some information, product, services, on anything else on Google.

For example, if I am searching for a course in content writing, I’ll go to Google and search ‘best content writing course in India’, ‘content writing course online’, or something similar. 

So, if someone is writing web content to represent a course, he will first find exactly what are searching for related to that particular course. Then, those keywords will be used within the content. 

The use of the right keywords helps in optimizing the content for the search queries of the people on Google. 

MUST READ: Top 100+ SEO Interview Questions (Freshers, Experienced, Manager)

4. What is the best way to use keywords within the content?

The right way of using keywords in content is to:

  • Research targeted keywords that are relevant to the content
  • Use the keywords in a natural way
  • No keyword should look forced
  • Don’t overuse the keywords
  • Use keywords in the meta title and meta description
  • Include relevant keywords as alt tags for images
  • Use the keyword in the page URL

5. How to promote the content once published?

Once an article or other content is published, we can promote it in the following ways:

  • Send an email to subscribers or customers
  • Share the content with link on social media platforms
  • Share social media posts in relevant groups
  • Reach out to other bloggers for backlink building
  • Reach out to relevant influencers to get your content shared

6. What is CTA in content writing?

CTA stands for Call to Action. It is the point of action for the visitors to a website. 

By curating the relevant content, the role of a writer is to persuade the audience to the CTA where they can take some action. It is a core part of marketing or advertising. 

Some of the common examples of CTA are the buttons on web pages like Buy Now, Call Now, Book Now, Enroll Now, etc. All these are Call to Actions (CTAs), but to make users click on these, the web page must have the content that can convince and persuade them for it.

7. What is guest blogging?

Guest blogging, also called guest posting, is the method of contributing the content to other blogs or websites as a guest author or writer. 

For example, if I want to write for a blog in a digital marketing niche, I’ll connect with the blogger and ask for the opportunity to write an article for them. If they allow, I’ll share the article with them (written according to their guidelines) and it will then be published in my name.

The article published will be called the guest article, and I’ll be the guest author

It is a win-win for both me and the blogger, because the blogger is getting free content that can bring traffic. Whereas, my benefits are that they are publishing it in my name, and I can include a link to my website within the guest article. It is good for SEO and marketing. 

8. What are the benefits of guest blogging?

Here is a quick list of guest blogging benefits:

  • Raise brand awareness
  • Backlink building for SEO
  • Reach new audience
  • Get referral traffic
  • Social media growth
  • Build email list

9. What is pillar content?

Pillar content is a comprehensive and detailed piece of content related to a topic. This content offers complete guidance to the users. The subtopics in pillar content have the scope of getting broken into individual topics. 

For example, there is a pillar content on the topic “Guide to Digital Marketing”. Here, we can cover everything related to digital marketing, including different forms of digital marketing, its importance, top tools, SEO, social media marketing, PPC advertising, Google Ads, YouTube marketing, affiliate marketing, email marketing, and content marketing, and more.

In this content, I’ll offer an overview of everything and the word count may go around 5000 to 60000. However, I still have the scope to cover detailed content on its subtopics like SEO, social media marketing, etc. 

10. What is Affiliate Marketing?

The process of promoting the products or services of businesses/individuals in exchange for some commission for every successful referral is called affiliate marketing.

For example, you can join the affiliate program of Amazon and start promoting its products through your blog. Whenever someone purchases anything from Amazon through your links, you will earn some commission for it.

11. What is voice SEO?

The process of optimizing the content for voice queries is called voice search engine optimization. 

Today, people are using digital assistant devices like Alexa, Siri, and Google Assistant. They tend to ask specific queries and questions to these devices. Then, the devices find information from Google and tell the answer to the users.

In order to optimize for those voice queries or voice keywords, we must opt for voice SEO.

12. How to optimize the content for voice SEO?

We should focus more on long-tail keywords and question-based keywords for voice SEO. Tools like UberSuggest and Answer The Public are great for finding long-tail keywords and questions asked by the users on Google. 

Use these keywords and questions naturally within the content. Moreover, try to include an FAQ section on the pages with FAQ schema for better structure. 

13. What is black hat SEO?

The SEO techniques and processes that are against the community guidelines of Google or the methods used to manipulate rankings on Google come under black hat SEO. 

14. What is keyword stuffing in content writing?

When you use too many keywords in the content and that too forcefully, it leads to keyword stuffing. It is a black hat SEO practice. Many website owners and SEOs use numerous keywords in a piece of content thinking that it will bring them more traffic. 

However, Google detects it and can penalize the website by dropping its rankings. 

15. Share the top SEO ranking factors that are in the hands of content writers?

While there are numerous rankings factors for SEO, content writers should take care of these:

  • Write high-quality content
  • Keyword research
  • Optimized meta title and meta description
  • Heading tags
  • Optimized images
  • Internal/External Links
  • Links to authority sites

16. What are long-tail keywords in content writing?

Long-tail keywords, as the name says, are those that are longer or have more words. These are usually more targeted, specific, and meet the user’s query. Such keywords are also great for voice SEO. 

Let’s understand the meaning of long-tail keywords with example. ‘online content writing course in india with certificate’ is a long-tail keyword as it has more than six words. 

In general, the keywords with more than three words are considered long tails. Another important characteristic of these keywords is that they have lower search volume but also low competition. It means that long-tail keywords are easier to rank for.

17. How to write an SEO-friendly title?

We can follow the following tips to write SEO-friendly titles:

  • It should be unique
  • Take care of the meta title length (within 580 px)
  • Make use of powerful words to grab user attention and improve CTR
  • Make sure to use the primary keyword in the title
  • Try to use the keyword at the beginning 

18. What are FAQs? What are the benefits of FAQs on a web page?

FAQs stand for Frequently Asked Questions. These are the most common questions of users about a product, service, or business. The FAQ section on a web page works like a go-to area for visitors looking to learn more or have any queries.

Benefits of FAQ Writing

  • Improve customer experience
  • Offer quick information to help customers make a purchasing decision
  • Reduce the time support or sales team needs to answer simple questions
  • Good for SEO
  • Boost sales since people will have basic information to make a decision

19. Please share some tips to write better FAQs.

By following the below FAQ writing tips, we can curate a better list of frequently asked questions and answers:

  • Know the common queries of the audience by talking to the support team, doing competitor research, and using tools like Answer The Public and Quora.
  • All questions must be written in the first person, and the answers in the second person.
  • Try to answer most questions within 100 words
  • Actually answer the questions 
  • Write like the audience talks
  • Questions must be relevant to the page’s context
  • Try to use relevant keywords 

20. What is thin content in SEO?

The content that offers little or no value to the visitors, or doesn’t meet the user intent is called thin content. 

Automatically-generated content, pages having a few words of content, blog categories with a low number of posts, doorway pages, etc. are examples of thin content. 

Websites must avoid thin content because it is bad for SEO, increases bounce rate, impacts conversion rate, and can bring penalties from Google.

21. What is the difference between content writing and content marketing?

It is the process of writing different forms of content to provide information, educate the audience, express, or persuade the website visitors to take an action. 

The role of content writing is done once a piece of content is published. 

On the other hand, content marketing includes the marketing of that published content to meet business objectives. Here, strategies and platforms come into the picture for the promotion of content, bringing traffic to content, and eventually meeting key marketing metrics.

In simple words, the role of a content writer is to create the content. Whereas, the role of a content marketer is to analyze the content, optimize it for SEO, promote it on social media, send content to the audience via emails, and perform other marketing activities. 

22. What are the free tools to optimize content for SEO?

Some of the most popular SEO content writing tools available for free are:

  • Google Keyword Planner
  • Answer The Public
  • Yoast SEO
  • Grammarly
  • Ubersuggest
  • Duplichecker
  • Word Counter
  • Rank Math SEO

Content Writing Interview Questions and Answers PDF Download

FAQs Related to Content Writer Interview

What is content writing job?

This is a job where you need to write unique and professional content for websites and blogs to help businesses represent their products, and services, as well as offer information to their target audience. 

As a content writer, your job is to work on a variety of content, like blog posts, web content, social media captions, guest posts, and more. 

Who are content writers?

Content writers are professionals who work for a business or website/blog to write original and engaging content. A content writer has writing skills and good hold over the language in which he is writing, like English, Hindi, etc. 

What does content writing include?

Content writing includes several types of content like articles, website content, product descriptions, product reviews, press release, eBooks, landing page content, etc. It also includes editing and proofreading of the content. 

Can anyone do content writing?

Yes. It is a skill-based job that requires basic writing skills and a good hold over grammar. Anyone can learn it easily with a reliable content writing certification course and by practicing different forms of content. 

What are the skills required to become a content writer?

The primary skills required for content writing include:

– Ability to write different types of content
– Good content research skills
– Knack of grammar
– Basic idea about SEO
– Basic writing skills
– Ability to create original content

What is the scope of content writing in India?

There is an increasing demand for content writers in almost every industry today. It is because all the businesses have shifted or are shifting online with a website and blog. The websites need unique content. Furthermore, there is no SEO without content. 

As all businesses and bloggers want to drive traffic to their websites, the demand and scope for content writers are massive. It is one of the best career options today with opportunities to work for top companies, brands, MNCs, startups, media houses, news portals, as well as established bloggers.

Which companies are hiring content writers in India?

Some of the top companies hiring content writers in India are:

– TCS
– College Dunia
– Zoho
– Accenture
– BYJU’S
– Meesho
– Unacademy
– Tech Mahindra
– Thrillophilia
– Genpact
– Amazon
– Times Internet
– GeeksforGeeks
– Vedantu
– WsCube Tech
– JustDial
– UpGrad
– Bada Business
– Travel triangle
– Inshorts
– Car Dekho

What are the responsibilities of a content writer?

– Research relevant topics
– Write unique content on different topics
– Create content for a website, blog, and other online sources like social media, PR, etc.
– Proofread and edit the content before publishing
– Coordination with SEO, development, and digital marketing teams
– Perform keyword research for articles and blog posts
– Update the content as and when required

Which is the best content writing course in India?

WsCube Tech’s content writing online course with certificate is the best in India for beginners to master content writing skills and build a great career. 

The post Top 78 Content Writing Interview Questions And Answers In 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/content-writing-interview-questions-answers/feed/ 0
Top 108 SEO Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/seo-interview-questions/ https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/seo-interview-questions/#respond Thu, 10 Oct 2024 12:27:50 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=1564 This is your complete guide to landing your dream job in the field of search engine optimization. Because, here, you will find the most asked and top SEO interview questions for freshers and experienced professionals both, along with the anwers. Every day, thousands of new websites come into existence. To fight the competition and drive...

The post Top 108 SEO Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

This is your complete guide to landing your dream job in the field of search engine optimization. Because, here, you will find the most asked and top SEO interview questions for freshers and experienced professionals both, along with the anwers.

Every day, thousands of new websites come into existence. To fight the competition and drive relevant traffic to the website, search engine optimization (SEO) is crucial. That’s the reason people who have the right SEO skills are in high demand.

If you are looking to build a career in this field or want to switch to a new job, you must be able to crack the SEO job interview. To help you with what is asked when appearing for the job, we have covered some of the most common SEO interview questions and answers for freshers, SEO Executive, SEO Analyst, Senior SEO Executive, as well as SEO Manager. 

seo course

These profiles are the most visible on the job portals and LinkedIn as companies keep on hiring SEO professionals. 

In this quick yet comprehensive write-up, we have covered the scope of SEO in India, the skills required to become an SEO Expert, things to know before appearing for the interview, and most importantly, the top SEO interview questions in 2025. 

Upskill Yourself With Live Training (Book Free Class)

Digital Marketing CourseSEO Course
Performance Marketing CourseGoogle Ads Course

Introduction to Search Engine Optimization (SEO)

If you are an absolute beginner, you must first know exactly what SEO is.

SEO stands for Search Engine Optimization. It is the process or technique of optimizing the ranking of a website on Google and other search engines like Bing, Baidu, and DuckDuckGo.

In simple terms, if you have a website, you want relevant people to visit it. In order to bring those people to your site, SEO is done. 

There are several things and factors that matter in SEO. When you go through these interview questions on SEO, you will get great knowledge of this field. Moreover, you will be able to crack your next interview to land that desired job. 

What is the Job of SEO?

The primary work of an SEO professional is to understand the latest ranking factors, create strategies accordingly, apply relevant techniques, and work with content and web development teams to optimize the website. 

Here, the motive is to improve the experience for the user while optimizing things for the search engines. Eventually, every strategy is focused on driving more traffic to the website and increasing the ranking for the relevant terms searched by the users on Google.

Suggested Reading: 9 Latest Social Media Marketing Trends You Can’t Ignore

Things to Know While Preparing for SEO Job Interview

Whether you are a fresher or an experienced professional, you must know certain things before applying for the job and going for an interview. 

Here is a quick list for your reference:

  • Well-organized and minimalist resume
  • Mention SEO results and success stories (for experienced)
  • Include SEO course or training in the resume along with institute name (if you have done it)
  • Keep multiple hard copies of the resume handy
  • Prepare for the actual interview with a mock interview
  • Keep course certifications, internship certificates, and experience letters handy
  • Go for the interview in a formal attire

Learn Basics of SEO Before Interview (For Freshers)

Many candidates think that they don’t need to have detailed knowledge of the field if they are freshers. But this is not true. Especially when you are applying for a job at a good organization, the basic interview questions for SEO freshers are asked. You must be able to answer those questions.

If you don’t learn the basics, it is a big mistake. You should go for an offline or online SEO course or internship so that landing a good job becomes easier. 

Below is a quick list of SEO fundamentals you must know:

Basic SEO Interview Questions For Freshers (2025)

Now that you know what you should do while applying for a job in search engine optimization, let’s go through the most asked SEO interview questions and answers for freshers

1. What is SEO in digital marketing?

SEO stands for Search Engine Optimization. It is a process or technique in digital marketing that involves optimizing a website for search engines like Google, Bing, Baidu, Duck Duck Go, etc.

It helps businesses and individuals to target relevant audiences on search engines. Since almost everyone today has access to the internet, the majority of them search their queries on Google and other search platforms.

By appearing for those search queries, websites have the opportunity to drive traffic to the website and make customers. To be able to appear for those search queries, called keywords, we need to do SEO.

2. What is the importance of SEO?

SEO plays a vital role in increasing the visibility of a website and business on search engines. It eventually helps in growing website traffic, attracting potential customers, selling products and services online, and growing the business.

Let’s understand the importance or role of SEO in digital marketing in a bit more detail:

a) Build trust and credibility

With SEO, businesses or individuals can show their websites to an unlimited number of users. As visibility improves, it helps in building trust and authority. 

For instance, if you search for terms related to digital marketing or SEO, you will find websites like neilpatel.com, backlinko.com, hubspot.com, searchenginejournal.com, etc., among the top results on the search results page.

Since these sites repeatedly appear to users, it improves their branding and authority. 

b) Reach a broad audience

There is no better organic way to reach millions of users than search engine optimization. By covering relevant content in a niche, a website can target a large base of audience. One can master the art of creating targeted content with a reliable online content writing course.

c) Improving user experience

While almost every business today has a website, not all are optimized for search engines. When a website opts for strategic SEO, it means the user experience will be improved. 

As the majority of SEO ranking factors are focused on enhancing the UX, such as website security, loading speed, quality content, etc., the users of a business will have a highly satisfactory experience. Hence, while preparing for SEO interview questions for freshers, you must know about user experience and why it matters so much.

d) Lead generation and conversion

To grow the business, generating more leads and sales is crucial. Since SEO helps in attracting the right audience to the website, businesses have more opportunities to convert them into customers. Best SEO courses in India and globally showcase how well you can utilize search engine optimization to generate quality leads.

e) Helps businesses quantify the output

SEO is measurable or quantifiable. Using tools like Google Analytics, you can track the number of people visiting the website, time spent by users on a particular web page, conversion rate on product pages, and much more. 

f) Long-term results

While businesses can generate leads and sales with PPC advertising and other forms of digital marketing, but SEO is a sustainable technique. 

3. What is Google Autocomplete?

When we search for anything on the Google Search bar, it shows us some suggestions automatically. The role of this feature is to help users complete the searches more conveniently and faster.

Since the autocomplete feature reflects suggestions on the basis of what is being searched on Google, it is of great use in SEO. We can understand what people are searching for related to our topic, product, service, or business.

seo interview questions and answers

4. What is a domain name?

A domain name is simply the primary name with which a website or blog runs. For example, the domain name of the website where you are reading the SEO interview questions right now is wscubetech.com

The domain name of Microsoft is microsoft.com. The domain names are unique, like usernames, and can’t be registered if anyone else has taken them.

5. What is the difference between a domain name and a domain name extension?

The domain name is the full name of a website like 

  • wscubetech.com, 
  • yourstory.com, 
  • bigrock.in, 
  • upsc.gov.in, etc.

On the other hand, the extension of a domain name is the suffix. For example, the domain name extension, also called TLD (top-level domain), of wscubetech.com is .com. The same for bigrock.in is .in. 

There are several types of domain name extensions available:

  • .com
  • .in
  • .net
  • .org
  • .edu
  • .co
  • .shop
  • .online
  • .wiki
  • .cab
  • .academy
  • .me
  • .app

Here is a comprehensive list of all the domain name extensions available for registration.

6. What are keywords in SEO?

Keywords are actually the most common search queries of users related to a specific product, service, information, etc. 

For example, if I am writing an article on the topic “Top 10 Laptops Under INR 50,000”, then I first need to find what people are searching for on Google related to this topic. 

For the given topic, the keywords can be:

  • “best laptops under 50k”, 
  • “laptops under 50000 in India”, 
  • “best laptops below 50000”, etc.

These keywords are then used within the primary content on the web page or article so that we can match the content with the queries of users. 

This is one of the most critical concepts in this field, which you must know in detail because such SEO interview questions for freshers are very frequently asked.

7. What is keyword density in SEO?

The meaning of keyword density is how many times a keyword is used within the content in an article or web page compared to the total number of words in that article or page.

It is presented in the percentage. For example, if I use a keyword 5 times within the content of 500 words, the keyword density will be 1%.

8. Does keyword density matter?

Yes. It matters in SEO. It is because if we use several keywords numerous times in our content, it can sometimes lead to keyword stuffing. 

Keyword stuffing is bad for search engine optimization. Hence, it would be great to take care of the right keyword density.

9. What is keyword stuffing in SEO?

According to Google, keyword stuffing is the process of using too many keywords on a web page for the sake of appearing in the top results for all those keywords. 

What it means is that the keywords are used without any content flow or context. It became a regular practice by many SEO professionals a few years ago, but Google now focuses on the context of the content and keywords used.

Now, keyword stuffing is a black hat SEO technique and works as a negative SEO ranking factor. To avoid this, the keywords must be used within the content in a natural flow. No keyword should look as if it is forced.

10. Can you share an example of keyword stuffing?

Here is a keyword-stuffing example (also featured by Google):

“We sell custom cigar humidors. Our custom cigar humidors are handmade. If you’re thinking of buying a custom cigar humidor, please contact our custom cigar humidor specialists at custom.cigar.humidors@example.com.”

The underlined parts of the content are keywords. All these keywords have been used repeatedly within a single paragraph just to optimize this content for multiple keywords. This is called keyword stuffing in SEO.

11. What is keyword difficulty in SEO?

The meaning of keyword difficulty is how difficult it is for a piece of content to rank for that keyword on Google’s first page.

If a keyword has low difficulty, it would need lesser effort to rank as compared to a keyword with high difficulty. 

12. What are the different types of keywords in SEO?

We can categorize the types of keywords in SEO on the basis of length and intent.

Types of SEO Keywords Based on Intent:

  • Informational keywords 
  • Navigational keywords 
  • Commercial keywords
  • Transactional keywords 

SEO Keyword Types on the Basis of Length:

  • Short-tail keywords
  • Mid-tail keywords
  • Long-tail keywords

Other Types of Keywords:

  • Geo-targeted keywords
  • LSI keywords
  • Long-term evergreen keywords
  • Short-term fresh keywords

13. Why is keyword research important in SEO?

The importance of keyword research in SEO is that it helps in finding what people are actually searching for on Google and other search engines. 

For any website, its products, services, or content to rank on search engines, the first step is finding the targeted keywords.

If we use the right keywords, only then can we optimize our pages for higher rankings and more traffic. Else, the content won’t rank even if it is written with quality in mind, and the overall website structure is fine.

14. Where do we use keywords?

It is one of the top SEO interview questions in 2025, as you must know how to use the right keywords at the right places.

The keywords are used in a number of different places on a page. For on-page SEO optimization, we should use keyword(s) in: 

  • Meta title
  • Meta description
  • URL
  • Page content
  • Image alt tag
  • Subheadings 
  • Anchor Text

15. What are seed keywords in SEO?

Seed keywords are those that have one to two words. These are short-tail keywords, typically with high monthly search volume and high SEO difficulty. 

These keywords help in finding ideas about other relevant keywords, like mid-tail and long-tail keywords. 

For example, ‘digital marketing’ is a seed keyword. It helps in finding other relevant keywords like ‘digital marketing course’ or ‘digital marketing services’.

16. What are long-tail keywords?

As the name suggests, long-tail keywords are those that are longer or have more words. These are usually more targeted, specific, and meet the user’s query. Such keywords are also great for voice SEO. 

Let’s understand the meaning of long-tail keywords with example. ‘online seo course in india with certificate’ is a long-tail keyword as it has more than six words. 

In general, keywords with more than three words are considered long tails. Another important characteristic of these keywords is that they have lower search volume but also low competition. It means that long-tail keywords are easier to rank for. 

17. What is the difference between long-tail vs short-tail keywords?

Both long-tail keywords and short-tail keywords play a major role in search engine optimization. 

The difference between the two is that short-tail keywords are short (1-2 words), whereas long-tail keywords are longer (3+ words)

In terms of search volume and competition, the short-tail keywords have higher volume and high competition. Whereas, long-tail keywords generally have low volume and low competition.

The long-tail keywords are slightly more targeted and easier to rank for compared to short-tails. For a new or low-authority website that is trying to build some traffic, it would be better to go with long tails.

18. Can you give me some examples of long-tail keywords?

Here are some good long-tail keyword examples:

19. What is the bounce rate in SEO?

The bounce rate of a website means the rate of visitors who come to a page on the website leaving without taking any further action

For example, a blog post on your website is driving good traffic, but the majority of users leave the page without clicking on any other links on the page. Then the bounce rate will be high.

For product and service pages, it can mean that users are leaving without buying anything or filling out the forms. 

The bounce rate in Google Analytics is calculated on the basis of the number of users coming to a web page and the number of users leaving without taking any action. 

A user is considered bounced when he:

  • Closes the tab or window
  • Clicks the back button on the browser
  • Pastes a new URL in the URL bar or searches for something else
  • Stays inactive for a long time and the browser session times out.

20. What is a sitemap in SEO?

A sitemap is a file that tells Google’s crawlers about the URLs of your website that you want them to crawl. It is like a link map of the site. 

Google and other search engines read this file, and it becomes efficient for them to understand the structure of your site. In the sitemap file, the website owners or SEOs include all the URLs of web pages, articles, and more that are meant to drive traffic.

Here is an example of what sitemap looks like:

website sitemap example

21. Why sitemap is important for SEO?

Sitemaps help search engines to easily navigate to the site and discover all the intended URLs for crawling and indexing. So, it improves the crawling of the site, which is good for search engine optimization.

Usually, if there is a small website where all the links are available in the menu or footer, then Google can crawl these links easily. However, if you have a large website with hundreds of pages, then a sitemap becomes crucial. Else, Google might now crawl some of the pages. 

You need to have a good idea about using sitemaps because such SEO interview questions for freshers are often asked.

22. How to find sitemap of any website?

The easiest way to find the website sitemap is by entering the URL of that website and adding sitemap.xml behind it.

For example, if I want to check the sitemap of wscubetech.com site, I’ll enter its URL (https://www.wscubetech.com/) and then add sitemap.xml behind it (https://www.wscubetech.com/sitemap.xml).

If this doesn’t work for a website, you should try the other variations of the sitemap file name (followed by site URL), which are:

  • /sitemap_index.xml
  • /sitemap-index.xml
  • /sitemap.txt
  • /sitemap/sitemap.xml
  • /sitemapindex.xml
  • /sitemap/index.xml
  • /sitemap1.xml

Lastly, there is one tricky way to find sitemap, which is by first locating the robots.txt file of the website. In the robots.txt, you can find the sitemap link. 

find website sitemap

23. What is a robots.txt file?

Robots.txt is a file that is used for providing instructions to search engine bots about how to crawl and index the website & its pages. 

This file is in .txt format, which means it includes only text, no HTML code. Its role is to avoid unnecessary visits by search engine bots on the site. Generally, this is the first file on the site visited by the crawlers. 

24. What is anchor text in SEO?

The anchor text is the clickable text on a page. In other words, if I have written a paragraph and hyperlinked one or more consecutive words, then the hyperlinked text here is the anchor text.

Usually, the anchor text is visible on the website in a different color than the normal content. For example, in the screenshot below, the text ‘content writing’ is linked to a relevant page. This is an anchor text here. 

seo anchor text

The role of using anchor text is to tell users the intent of the link. Here, if I have linked ‘Content writing’, it means users will land on a page related to content writing. It is also good for SEO as search engines get the context.

25. What are meta tags in SEO? What are different types of meta tags?

Meta tags are snippets of HTML code, and these are used for structuring the content on a page, and telling Google and other search engines about the content. For example, we can use a meta title to tell search engines what page title to show to the users on SERP.

Every page on a website has meta tags. These tags are part of the code and are not visible to the end users. 

The following are the primary meta tags used in SEO:

  • Meta title
  • Meta description
  • Meta robots
  • Heading tags (H1 to H6)
  • Image alt tags
  • Canonical link tag
  • Social media meta tags
  • Meta viewport

26. Do meta tags help in SEO?

Yes. Meta tags are good for search engine optimization. It is because these tags help in telling Google what title and description to show on Google, how the content is structured, etc.

However, you should understand that not all meta tags are going to help in SEO all the time. 

27. What are meta keywords?

Meta keywords are a type of meta tag, but nowadays, these are not used. In old-age SEO, the meta keywords were used to tell search engines about the intent of the page. 

However, it was being abused to manipulate rankings. Hence, Google and most of the other search engines no longer consider this meta tag.

28. What is meta title in SEO?

The meta title is the title of a page that is shown to users when that page appears in SERP. Also called the title tag, it is also shown to users on the browser tab. For example, the meta title of our web page about online digital marketing course shows something like this in SERP:

what is meta title in seo

29. What should be the meta title length? Is there any character limit?

The length of the meta title should be between 50 to 60 characters so that it is properly visible to the users on SERP. If the meta title is longer, Google will cut it off after the defined length.

One important thing to note is that Google is now considering the meta title length in terms of pixels instead of characters. The meta title should be within 580 px

30. How to check the meta title length? Are there any tools?

Yes. There are several tools to check the meta title length. I usually prefer these two tools:

meta title length checker

31. What is meta description in SEO? Why is it used?

The meta description is the short summary of the intent of the page. It is shown in SERP below the meta title and helps in telling users what to expect on the page and convincing them to click.

meta description in seo

32. What is the alt tag in SEO?

The alt tag is an HTML tag used to define the intent or purpose of the image on a page to users and search engines. It is called alt text or alternative text.

33. Why to use alt tag for images?

There are a number of crucial benefits of using image alt tags:

  • To tell search engines what the image is about. It is great for SEO.
  • In case the image fails to load, the alt text will appear to users.
  • If visually impaired people are browsing a page, the screen reader will speak the alt text. It helps them to better understand that there is an image and what it is about.

Interview Questions for SEO Executive (1-2 Years Exp.)

If you have been in the field of SEO for a year or two now, then the following SEO executive interview questions and answers will be highly relevant for you. By preparing for these (along with the questions mentioned above), you can easily crack the interview round.

1. What are the top ranking factors in SEO in 2025?

This is among the frequently asked SEO interview questions whether you are a fresher or an experienced executive.

There are numerous SEO ranking factors that are important to optimize the positioning of a website on Google. 

Below are some of the major ranking factors for SEO in 2025:

  • Use of targeted and relevant keywords
  • High-quality content
  • Website loading speed
  • Website security 
  • SSL Certificate
  • Mobile-friendly
  • Backlinks from niche-specific authority sites
  • Optimized meta title and description 
  • Image optimization
  • Proper use of heading tags
  • Internal and external linking
  • Fixing broken links
  • SEO-friendly URLs
  • Server location 
  • Website uptime
  • Website usability 
  • Schema and structured data
  • Low bounce rate
  • Domain authority
  • Sitemap 
  • Canonical tags
  • Core web vitals

2. How does Google Autocomplete work?

When people search their queries on the Google search engine, the platform understands the language, location, and interest of that query. On the basis of these factors, Google shows the suggestions to other users accordingly.

3. How to use Google Autocomplete for SEO?

Since the autocomplete suggestions offered by Google Search are based on the queries of the people, we can understand what people are searching for on Google. It also helps in finding long-tail keywords.

Moreover, we can use autocomplete suggestions to target specific keywords within our content. 

4. What is ccTLD?

ccTLD stands for country code Top-Level Domain. These domain name extensions are generally used for country-specific websites or by those who have targeted customers in a particular country. 

Some examples of ccTLD are as follows:

  • .in (India)
  • .ae (United Arab Emirates)
  • .au (Australia)
  • .ca (Canada)
  • .cn (China)
  • .eu (European Union)
  • .fr (France)
  • .gr (Greece)
  • .jp (Japan)
  • .lk (Sri Lanka)
  • .ru (Russia)

You can find the list of all ccTLDs here.

5. Does a ccTLD help in SEO?

Yes, it can help in international SEO if used the right way. A ccTLD tells Google and other search engines that the website is specially meant for a particular country or geographical region.

So, if I have a business in India and my targeted customers are in the US, then I can go with the .us ccTLD to do the international SEO. With this, I’ll be able to convey to Google that my audience belongs to the US country. 

6. What is International SEO?

International Search Engine Optimization, as the name suggests, is used when a business/individual wants to optimize its website or blog for a specific country or region. 

For instance, if the majority of the users on my website come from India, then I can further optimize it to provide a better user experience. 

On this front, I can use the Hindi language on the site, go for a .in TLD, specify language tags, have a country-specific subdomain or subdirectory, etc. 

  • mydomain.in
  • in.mydomain.com
  • mydomain.com/in
  • mydomain.com/?lang=en-in

If you have been in this field for some time now, then these types of SEO interview questions for 1-year experience are so common.

7. What is a good keyword density percentage?

Google has not specified any fixed rules for keyword density percentage. It doesn’t tell us how many times we should repeat a keyword.  

However, many SEO Experts suggest that we should keep the keyword density between 1 to 2%. It means we can use one or two keywords within the content of 100 words. This is great for avoiding keyword stuffing.

So, a good keyword density is 2%. 

8. How to check keyword density? 

We can use the keyword density checker formula to calculate the percentage of keywords used within the content.

As per the keyword density formula, divide the total number of times a keyword is used by the total word count in the article or web content. Then, multiply the result by 100. It will give us the keyword density percentage.

Keyword Density Formula

Keyword Density = (No. of times a keyword is used / total word count) * 100

keyword density formula

Keyword Density Example 

If I am writing an article of 1000 words and using a keyword 15 times, then the density will be:

(15/1000)*100 = 1.5%

9. Which is the best keyword density checker or calculator?

While there are several online keyword density checker tools available, there are a few on which we can rely on:

10. What does the keyword difficulty score tell you?

The score of keyword difficulty tells us that if I use a keyword in my content with the intention of ranking for it on Google, how much more difficult it will be for me.

The keyword difficulty score is based on how many websites are targeting those keywords, as well as the authority of websites and the quality of content already ranking on top of Google’s SERP.

11. What is a good keyword difficulty score?

The right score for keyword difficulty depends on the website for which we are doing keyword research. If we have a high authority website with quality content and high traffic, we can go with the keywords that have high keyword difficulty.

On the other hand, if we are doing SEO for a new website or low-authority site, then it is suggested to use keywords that have low or medium difficulty. 

A better step would be to use keywords that can be ranked easily. Over time, we can build the authority and then go for higher-difficulty keywords. 

12. Can you categorize keyword difficulty scores into low, medium, and high?

Sure. The keyword difficulty score ranges on a scale of 1 to 100.

  • Low keyword difficulty score: 1 to 29
  • Medium keyword difficulty score: 30 to 70
  • High keyword difficulty score: 70 to 100

13. What is keyword frequency in SEO?

Keyword frequency means how often a keyword is used within the content. If a keyword is used several times within the content, its frequency rate will be higher. Similarly, if I use a keyword lesser times, the frequency rate will be lower.

The SEO keyword frequency is very similar to keyword density, which also represents how many times a keyword appears within the content.

14. How many keywords can you use in an article?

The number of keywords to be used depends on the total number of words in the article. It is because we need to maintain the right keyword density.

A good keyword density is between 1% to 2%. So, if I am writing an article of 1000 words, then I can use around 7-8 keywords. However, we must still ensure that every keyword is used in a natural flow. 

15. How to find long-tail keywords? Please share some tips and tools.

There are several ways to find long-tail keywords for search engine optimization. Here are some top tools and tips:

a) Make the most out of Google Autocomplete

When you type your short-tail keyword in the Google Search bar, it automatically provides some suggestions. These suggestions are shown on the basis of what people are searching for on Google related to your topic. 

google autosuggest

b) Check the ‘Related Searches’ section 

Similar to Google Autocomplete, the Related Searches section available at the bottom of the SERP shows queries related to your topic. 

You just need to search for your keyword on Google and go to this section. Not all suggestions might be relevant, but this is a good idea to pick some good long-tail keywords.

top seo interview questions

c) Use keyword research tools

SEO tools like Ubersuggest, Ahrefs, and SEMrush also show you long-tail keywords and questions. Make sure to make the most out of these. 

d) Use Answer The Public

Answer The Public is a great tool to find questions and long keywords related to your phrase. No other tools show more long tails than this tool.

answerthepublic tool for seo

e) Analyze and use Quora questions

Quora is another platform that has questions that have been asked by real users. These questions show how people search for things. Just search for your keyphrase on Quora and pick the right questions.

f) Use Keyword Tool Dominator

It is a free tool that helps you research long-tail keywords with low competition. Keyword Tool Dominator shows the search queries of users based on Google’s autocomplete feature. To be precise, it is your advanced Google Suggest tool.

16. What are geo-targeted keywords in SEO? Explain with an example.

The keywords that show the searcher’s intent to find a local business based on location are called geo-targeting keywords.

For example, if someone is searching for a ‘Digital Marketing Course in Jodhpur’, then his intent here is to find a course available in Jodhpur City. 

Let’s take another example. Someone searches for ‘Samsung showroom in Jaipur’. His intention is more likely to find and visit the local Samsung showroom in the city of Jaipur.

To be precise, you can say that the keywords that have some location in them are known as geo-targeted keywords.

17. What are navigational keywords in SEO? Explain with an example.

Navigational keywords mean that the searcher is looking for a web page on a specific website directly from Google. The user, in this case, is generally aware of or knows about the page’s product/service/information and wants to find it quickly. 

Navigational Keyword Examples

Generally, the navigational keywords have the name of the product, brand, service, location, etc.

18. Does bounce rate affect the SEO of a website?

Yes. Bounce rate can impact the website’s SEO. It is because when a high number of visitors leave the site without taking any action, it can mean that they are not satisfied with the content, user experience, website speed, or other things.

Since SEO is all about how a better experience you can offer to users, the bounce rate shows that the users aren’t highly satisfied. It can hamper the ranking of specific pages, especially when the bounce rate for similar pages of competitors is lower.

19. What is the bounce rate formula? How to calculate the bounce rate for a website?

We can use the bounce rate formula to calculate the bounce rate of a web page.

As per the formula, divide ‘the number of visitors leaving the page without action’ by ‘the total number of visitors on the page’. Then, multiply the result by 100. It will give us the bounce rate percentage.

Bounce Rate Formula in Google Analytics

Bounce Rate = (No. of visitors leaving without action / total page visits) * 100

what is bounce rate formula

Example:

Let’s understand the calculation with an example. If 1,000 people are visiting a web page, and 600 of them are leaving without taking any action, then the bounce rate will be:

(600/1000)*100 = 60%

20. What can be the reasons behind the high bounce rate of a website?

It is one of the top SEO interview questions for experienced professionals. You need to know about concepts of bounce rate, its role, why it matters, and how you can reduce it.

There can be several reasons behind the increased bounce rate of a page. Some of the primary factors are listed below:

  • The speed of the page or website is slow
  • Lack of strategic internal linking on the page
  • Misleading meta title tag
  • Use of clickbait techniques
  • Users landing on a blank page
  • It is a landing page
  • Low-quality content
  • Poor UI/UX

21. What is a session in Google Analytics?

Session in GA is the time duration for which a visitor is active on a page, website, or mobile app. 

In case, a user leaves the site and comes back within 30 minutes, then it will be considered part of the previous session. 

Moreover, if a user remains on the site for 30 minutes due to inactivity or other reasons, then a new session starts after that. 

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

SEO Interview QuestionsPower BI Interview Questions
Digital Marketing Interview QuestionsJavaScript Interview Questions
Email Marketing Interview QuestionsFlutter Interview Questions
Content Writing Interview QuestionsNodeJS Interview Questions

22. What is the average session duration in Google Analytics?

The average duration for a session in Google Analytics is 2 to 3 minutes. 

It is calculated on the basis of the total session duration (time spent) by all users divided by the total number of sessions. 

Average Session Duration Formula:

(Total Session Durations by All Users / Total Number of Sessions)

Example:

Let’s understand this with an example. If the period of time spent by all the users is 800 seconds and the number of total sessions is 20, then the average session duration will be:

(800/20) = 40 seconds

23. What is dwell time in SEO?

The meaning of dwell time is when a user clicks on a result from the SERP, visits the page, and comes back to the SERP. The period of time spent on that page between visiting the page from SERP and coming back to SERP is called the dwell time. 

It happens so often when users browse the page to find out whether it fulfils the purpose. The user can go back after consuming the content or return to SERP instantly (in case the page fails to meet the expectation of the user).

24. Does dwell time affect SEO? Is it a ranking factor?

Google has neither said that dwell time is a ranking factor, nor has denied it. 

However, there have been certain clues that show that Google considers it while ranking a website. For example, the RankBrain algorithm by Google mentions that the search engine checks the time duration spent by a user on a web page. 

It means dwell time is somehow a ranking factor. 

25. How to create a sitemap for a website?

There are both manual and automatic ways to create a website sitemap. For small websites with a low number of pages, it can be created manually using Notepad.

However, the best way to do this is by using an online tool like XML-sitemaps.com or my sitemap generator.

For WordPress websites, SEO plugins like Yoast SEO generate sitemaps automatically.

26. Which SEO metrics are the most important to measure?

The most important metrics to measure in SEO are:

  • Ranking of primary keywords
  • Total website traffic on a monthly basis
  • Click-through Rate (CTR)
  • Bounce Rate
  • Conversion Rate

Must Read: How to Secure WordPress Website? Best Practices & Tips

SEO Interview Questions for Experienced (2-5 Years Senior Executive)

If you have been in the field of search engine optimization for more than two years now, then switching to a new job can prove to be very fruitful. You can get better packages and career growth.

While going for the job, you must prepare for these top SEO interview questions and answers for experienced professionals. Whether you have 2 years experience, 3 years experience, or even 5 years of experience, these questions will do the work for you. 

Also, make sure to go with the above questions as well. 

1. What does the term Sandbox mean in SEO?

Google Sandbox is like a filter that doesn’t allow newly-built websites to rank on the top results of SERP. Although Google has never confirmed anything such, but experienced SEO professionals have observed it on several occasions. 

Even when they worked on all the SEO factors the right way, their websites didn’t receive top rankings for a few months. 

2. What is Google Suggest?

Google Suggest is another name for the autocomplete suggestions provided by the search engine giant. As discussed above, it improves the user experience for people searching for their queries on Google. 

From the SEO point of view, it is a great option to look out for long-tail keywords and understand the search intent of users. 

3. What is keyword proximity in SEO?

The meaning of keyword proximity is how distant or close two words/phrases are from each other in a piece of content. If those words are closer to each other, then the proximity will be higher. Similarly, if those words are far from each other, the proximity will be lower.

Here is an example of keyword proximity in SEO:

  • WsCube Tech’s Digital Marketing Course is great. I love the institute.
  • It’s great to do Digital Marketing Course. I love WsCube Tech institute.

If someone searches for ‘wscube tech digital marketing course’ on Google, the chances of appearing in the first result are higher compared to the second.

It is because the words WsCube Tech and digital marketing course are closer to each other in the first sentence. In the second sentence, there is a distance of two words between WsCube Tech and Digital Marketing Course.

So, the keyword proximity is higher in the first sentence.

4. What is keyword prominence in SEO?

Keyword prominence is the process of using the primary keyword of the content within the initial part of it. 

For example, I am writing an article on the topic “Top SEO Interview Questions for Freshers and Experienced”. Here, for instance, my primary keyword is ‘seo interview questions’. Then I should try to use this keyword within the first 100 words.

It will give prominence to the primary keyword and tell the search engines that my content is related to this topic. Eventually, keyword prominence helps in search engine optimization.

5. Why should we use long-tail keywords for SEO?

The primary reason to use long-tail keywords in SEO is that it allows you to optimize the content for specific and targeted search queries. 

Moreover, the competition on these keywords is generally lower compared to seed keywords or mid-tail keywords. It means your chances of ranking for those queries will be higher.

6. What are transactional keywords in SEO? Explain with an example.

The keywords that show the intent of the user or searcher to buy something or take some important action are called transactional keywords. 

What it means is that there are higher chances of the user purchasing something. So, if that user lands on our website, the probability of his conversion is more. Hence, it is recommended to use transactional keywords on product/service pages, as well as in ad campaigns.

Transactional keywords examples:

Such keywords usually include terms like buy, deal, cheap, discount, where to buy, etc.

  • Where can I buy iPhone for cheap
  • Buy shoes for men
  • Web hosting deals
  • Earphones sale

Related Reading: 30+ Most Asked Digital Marketing Interview Questions & Answers

7. What is the difference between bounce rate vs exit rate?

The next concept on our list of SEO interview questions and answers is about exit rate vs bounce rate.

Bounce rate and exit rate in SEO are not the same, even though there are some misconceptions around it.

The bounce rate is calculated on the basis of the number of users visiting a page against the number of users leaving without action.

On the other hand, the exit rate in SEO is calculated when a user comes to Page A, then goes to Page B, and so on, and then leaves it. The exit rate will be counted on the page where the user left the website. 

The bounce rate is calculated only if the session starts on a page and ends there. Whereas, the exit rate is calculated when the user navigates to other pages from one page and then leaves the website from a certain page. 

Let’s understand the difference between exit rate and bounce rate in SEO with an example:

a. Session A: Page 1 > Page 2 > Page 3 > Exit

b. Session B: Page 2 > Page 3 > Exit

c. Session C: Page 1 > Page 3 > Page 2 > Exit

Here, 2 users are leaving the site from Page 3, while one is leaving from Page 2.

So, the exit rate for Page 1 will be 0% since the users didn’t leave from here. Second, the exit rate on Page 2 will be 33% as one user left the website out of three sessions.

Third, the exit rate on Page 3 will be 66% as two users left the site from here out of three sessions.

In this example, none of the users left the site from a single page. So the bounce rate on all three pages will be 0%. It is because bounce rate is calculated only if a user comes to a specific page and leaves without navigating further.

8. What bounce rate is good in SEO?

A good bounce rate varies on the niche of the website and the type of page. On average, the bounce rate should be between 40% to 50%.

Here is a quick overview of the good bounce rate in SEO on the basis of niches and types of sites:

  • eCommerce sites: 20% to 45%
  • Content-based sites and blogs: 35% to 60%
  • Landing pages: 60% to 90%
  • Web portals, news sites, event sites, and dictionaries: 65% to 90%
  • B2B sites: 25% to 55%

In general, you can categorize the bounce rate as follows:

  • Poor: 70% or more
  • Average: 55% to 70%
  • Good: 41% to 70%
  • Excellent: 25% to 40%

9. What steps can we take to reduce the bounce rate?

Here are some crucial tips to decrease the bounce rate of a website:

  • Ensure that your meta title matches the content
  • Improve content readability
  • Enhance website UI
  • Avoid too many ads
  • Add images and media on the page
  • Work on improving website speed
  • Use internal linking in a strategic way
  • Make sure there are no technical glitches 

10. What is the difference between dwell time and bounce rate?

There is a slight difference between bounce rate vs dwell time.

In dwell time, the users come to a page from SERP and then return to the SERP. 

Whereas, the visitors who bounce can come from SERP, social media, direct links, or anywhere else. Moreover, even if they come from the search results page, it is not guaranteed that they returned to that SERP. 

Bounce rate is considered even if the users close the tab, type in a new URL, or went to another website. 

11. Other than XML, which sitemap formats does Google support?

Here is the list of sitemap formats supported by Google:

  • XML
  • RSS
  • mRSS
  • Atom 1.0
  • Txt

12. What is the maximum number of links a sitemap can have?

A sitemap can have a maximum of 50,000 links. Google will not crawl more than it. 

If there are more than 50,000 URLs on a website, then multiple sitemaps will need to be created.

13. What is the maximum file size a sitemap can have?

The maximum file size of a sitemap can be 50 MB. For sitemaps that exceed 50 MB, the best practice is to reduce their size and divide them into multiple files.

14. Can you share some anchor text best practices?

Here are some of the tips for optimizing an anchor text for SEO:

a) Keep it precise

There is no defined word limit for the anchor text, but you should try to keep it precise. You can think about the user intent and decide what anchor text will drive more clicks.

b) It should be relevant to the linked page

The anchor text must reflect the topic or intent of the page link where users will land.

c) Don’t Overoptimize

An anchor text should not be over-optimized. It means don’t use the same keyword as anchor text for internal links and backlinks. It looks suspicious to Google, especially after the Penguin algorithm update.

d) Don’t use generic words

Many people put the link on common words like ‘click here’ and ‘read more’. This is not a good practice for anchor text optimization.

15. What should be the meta description length? Is there any character limit?

The meta description character limit is 155 to 160. However, nowadays, Google is counting meta descriptions on the basis of pixels instead of characters.

So, the meta description length should be below 990px.

These are some latest trends that you need to know as you will be asked about these among SEO interview questions.

16. What is SEO canonicalization?

Canonicalization in SEO is used for avoiding duplicate URLs and content issues. This is done using canonical tags, which tell Google about the page URL that you want to be indexed. 

Sometimes, a page can have multiple URL variations and parameters. Google might not know which URL to index. To avoid this, canonicalization is used. 

17. What is the difference between the alt tag, title, and caption of an image?

Following are the differences between image title vs alt tag vs caption:

a) Image alt tag

Its role is to tell Google and search engines about the intent of the image used. The alt tag is also helpful for visually impaired people as it speaks the alt tag of the image. 

b) Image title

It is the name of the image. Google also checks for the image title to better understand the purpose of the image. Moreover, whenever users hover over the image on a page, the title becomes visible. 

c) Image caption

If you want to show some text under the image on a blog post or page, the caption is used. For instance, you can use it to show the ‘image source’, etc. 

18. What is a redirect meta tag?

The redirect meta tag in SEO is used for automatically redirecting visitors from one page to another. This is usually used when a page is temporarily or permanently moved, deleted, or the page URL is changed. 

For example, if I am deciding to change my domain name and move the website to a new domain name, then the redirection tag can be used. All the users coming to the previous domain will be redirected to the new one.

19. Why is an SSL Certificate a ranking factor?

The role of an SSL certificate is to secure and encrypt the data or information submitted by users on a website. This data travels from the browser to the website server. If an SSL certificate is not there, this data can be compromised or intercepted by hackers. 

Since it hampers the user experience and results in data leakage for users, Google considers it a ranking factor. 

20. What is mobile SEO?

Mobile SEO is the search engine optimization technique to improve the experience and performance of a website for mobile devices. 

Since Google indexes the mobile version of the website, it is crucial now to go for mobile SEO. The reason behind Google considering it is that the majority of website traffic today comes from mobile devices like smartphones and tablets. 

21. What is the difference between do-follow and no-follow backlinks?

These are the types of backlinks. If it is a do-follow backlink, the PageRank signals or link juice will be passed to it because Google’s crawlers will follow the link.

Whereas, the link juice will not be passed if it is a Nofollow link. 

Technically, all the links are do-follow by default. On the other hand, the no-follow links have the rel=” nofollow” tag. Crawlers decide whether to follow the link or not on the basis of these tags.

22. What is SEM? How is it different from SEO?

The full form of SEO is search engine optimization. On the other hand, SEM stands for search engine marketing.

Let’s understand the difference between SEM and SEO.

SEO is the process of optimizing a website’s ranking and driving traffic from search engines in an organic manner.

Whereas, SEM includes driving traffic from search engines both organically and through paid advertising.

So, for example, I am running Google Search Ads and also optimizing my website’ SEO, then I am doing SEM.

23. What is keyword stemming?

The ability of Google’s algorithm to understand the context of the text on a page and match it with a relevant search query is called keyword stemming in SEO.

For example, if I have used ‘buy web hosting’ on my page, the search engine algorithm understands the different variations of the word ‘buy’. Accordingly, it can show the page to the users even when they search for things like ‘buying web hosting’ or ‘purchase web hosting’.

24. What are link penalties and how to recover from these?

– Meaning of Link penalty

When you build a high number of backlinks to your website that is spammy, from low-quality content, unnatural, repetitive, etc., Google will penalize your site and remove it from indexing. This is called link penalty in SEO.

It is because Google considers unnatural and spammy link building as a violation of its webmaster guidelines. 

– Ways to Recover From Link Penalties

If there are backlinks violating the webmaster guidelines, you need to get rid of them in order to recover from link penalties. Here is how you can do it:

a) Create a list of all your website’s backlinks

You can use tools like Ubersuggest or SEMrush to find the backlinks. 

b) Find the bad backlinks

Check the links coming from spammy sites, duplicate content, irrelevant niche sites, thin content sites, as well as adult or gambling sites.

c) Remove these links or request removal

If you have created these links from sites where you can log in, remove all these backlinks.

On sites where you can’t remove links on your own, create an email template and send the emails to the website owners. Request them to remove your links. 

d) Disavow 

Create a disavow report of all the bad links and submit it using webmaster tools. 

25. What is a link audit and its importance?

The process of auditing or checking the backlink profile of a website is called link auditing. 

A link audit is crucial for SEO to find whether the backlinks are healthy or not. During the audit, we can find if there are bad links that can hamper the SEO. Moreover, a high number of bad links can also cause link penalties. So, conducting a regular link audit is important. 

26. What is eCommerce SEO?

The process of optimizing an eCommerce website or online store for search engines is called eCommerce SEO.

eCommerce sites are slightly different from general sites as these have a lot of products, categories, and images. The number of pages can be higher here, and all the product pages need to be optimized to drive traffic. 

27. What is redirection and its types?

Redirection is the technique of redirecting users from one page to another automatically. This is used when a page has been moved to a new URL, deleted, or changed. 

If the redirection is not done, the users will land on a blank page or 404 page. This is bad for SEO. So, a redirection tag is used.

There are several types of redirections in SEO:

  • 301 Redirection
  • 302 Redirection
  • 303 Redirection
  • 307 Redirection
  • 308 Redirection
  • Meta refresh redirect

28. What is the difference between 301 and 302 redirection?

  • 301 Redirection: It is used for permanent redirection. This tells Google that you have permanently moved the page or resource. Google will then index the new page. 
  • 302 Redirection: It is used for temporary redirection. This is done when you have set up the redirection for a particular time period. Google will then not remove the previous URL from indexing. 

29. What is the role of schema?

A schema is a form of microdata that provides context to a page. It helps in telling Google exactly what is the context of the page. 

For example, we can use schema to define whether it is a product page, event page, person page, organization page, recipe, video, review, etc. 

It also helps in getting your content shown in featured snippets on the SERP. 

SEO Manager Interview Questions and Answers

So far, we have gone through the top interview questions on SEO for freshers and experienced professionals having 0 to 5 years of experience.

But if you are an SEO Manager or applying for a managerial role, then some tough questions are asked. Below is a list of common SEO manager interview questions with answers.

Also, ensure to go cover the topics covered above as well.

1. What is Google AMP? Start with its full form.

AMP stands for Accelerated Mobile Pages

It is an open-source web framework built by Google. The aim of Google AMP is to optimize the websites for performance, smooth user experience, and load fast even when there are ads on the sites.

When websites implement Google AMP, the pages become lightweight and offer high performance across all screen sizes and browsers. 

2. Tell me about the biggest mistakes that you have done in SEO?

Please note that this is among the most common SEO specialist interview questions. You must be prepared for it. 

For the answer, you can go down your career lane and create a list of SEO mistakes you have done. These can be the times when you published duplicate content, created spammy links unintentionally that declined website rankings, did keyword stuffing in the initial stage of your career, etc. 

Mention those mistakes that hampered the website rankings and the monthly traffic. 

3. What are contextual links in SEO?

Contextual links are those backlinks that have been built from a piece of content that has some context. The content should be relevant to the context of the link. 

In SEO, contextual links have more value than links built from website sidebars, footers, or irrelevant content. 

Example of contextual link building

For instance, I have written and published an article on ‘how to learn SEO’ and tried to build a backlink to it from an article written on ‘how to become a digital marketer’. This article will be a good fit for me to build a contextual link, especially when there is mention of starting a career in SEO. 

4. What is the Rankbrain algorithm in SEO? Why is it important?

Google RankBrain is an algorithm based on machine learning that has now become a crucial part of Google’s core search engine algorithm. What RankBrain does is understand the context or intent of the search query in an intelligent manner and show the most relevant results.

The RankBrain algorithm considers several factors about a search query before showing up the results. These factors include the search intent, user location, words searched, personalization, previous searches by the users, etc. All these are done so that Google can show the best results to users. 

Example of Google RankBrain in action

For example, if I search for ‘backlink checker’, my intent is to find a tool that can help me check the backlinks. So, Google will show me a backlink checker tool.

seo manager interview questions

Whereas, if I search for ‘top backlink checkers’, Google will show me the list of tools or a blog post with relevant content, instead of an online tool. 

This is because the Google RankBrain algorithm understands the intent and context of the user. 

5. How to develop a solid SEO strategy?

When you are applying for a senior role, this is one of the most asked SEO manager interview questions. You must have experience and knowledge both of how to create a great SEO strategy for different verticals.

Before going for the interview, know about the industry/niche of the company, and understand what can be the best SEO strategy for that niche. 

If the business industry is as same as your current job, then things become a bit easier for you. 

Regardless of the niche, these are some common steps for creating an effective SEO strategy:

  • Research the right keywords according to business products, services, etc.
  • Perform competitor research to understand what they are doing to rank on top
  • Understand how you can do better than competitors
  • Find on-page SEO gaps and work on it
  • Optimize website content for search intent
  • Creating high-quality backlinks from niche sites
  • Optimize existing content and work on fresh content

6. What is disavow in SEO?

When there are spammy backlinks, it can hamper the ranking of the website on Google. We can use the disavow tool to tell Google that we don’t want certain backlinks to be counted. 

The disavow is usually performed after link auditing or when the ranking of the faces loses in rankings. 

7. What is the difference between Google Analytics and Google Analytics 4?

There are a number of important differences between Universal Analytics and Google Analytics 4. Following are the primary differences:

a) Distinct measurement model

Universal Analytics (current GA) measures data on the basis of sessions and pageviews. Whereas, GA4 measures data based on events and parameters. Everything in GA4 is an event. 

b) No Categories in GA4

In the current and previous versions of GA, the events have a category, action, label, and hit type. Whereas, GA4 doesn’t have any categories, actions, and labels. 

c) Free connection to BigQuery

This is a major difference. Google Analytics 4 brings free connection to BigQuery. It is a premium feature that was available only to the users of Google Analytics 360. 

Below is the quick tabular comparison of Universal Analytics vs Google Analytics 4:


Google AnalyticsGoogle Analytics 4
Measurement TypeBased on sessionsBased on events
Hits Limit10 millionnone
Use of Machine LearningBasic levelAdvanced level
Basic metricsPageviewsEvents
Sampling5 lakh+10 lakh+
Privacy thresholdNoYes
Connection to BigQueryNoYes
Engagement MetricBounce rateEngaged sessions/user

8. Does Google Analytics have a premium plan?

Yes. The premium version of GA is called Google Analytics 360. It provides numerous additional features and benefits. GA 360 is crucial for large websites driving millions of traffic, and businesses that want to make the most out of data and analytics. 

9. What are the features and benefits of Google Analytics 360?

There are plenty of features that Google Analytics 360 has compared to Universal Analytics. 

Here is a quick list of Google Analytics 360 features:

  • Data volume capacity of up to 20 billion hits
  • Salesforce integration
  • Add 400 views per web property
  • Dedicated GA account manager
  • Support in GA 360 implementation
  • Training by analytics experts from Google
  • Data integration services
  • Integration with Google Drive
  • Integration with BigQuery
  • Custom funnel reporting
  • Data-driven attribution model
  • Digital measurement strategy

10. What is the cost of Google Analytics 360?

The Google Analytics 360 price starts from $150K per year. The billing is done on a monthly basis, which means you need to pay $12,500 per month.

The cost may be more on the basis of features required and the website size. 

11. Tell me about your greatest SEO success story?

You must be prepared for this as it is among the top interview questions on SEO for a managerial role. 

Here, you need to answer honestly and share your experience when you worked on a project and brought the website to Google’s first page for various high-volume keywords, or generated millions of monthly traffic. 

The SEO success story varies for every individual. But since you are applying for the role of an SEO Manager, you have years of experience in this field. It means you definitely must have some good projects on which you worked. 

12. What can you do in case Google bans your website because of black hat SEO?

If Google bans your website, the first thing to do is find the cause behind it. Black hat SEO is broad, like white hat SEO. You need to find and evaluate which black hat SEO technique has caused the penalty. 

Here are some of the things to look for:

  • Duplicate content
  • Links from poor websites
  • Spammy backlinks
  • Hidden links on the website
  • Keyword stuffing
  • Virus on website
  • Bad redirects
  • Cloaking 

Once you have found the issue, it is time to fix it. For example, if you have found spammy backlinks, then you need to get rid of these links manually and submit the disavow report to Google.

In case you find duplicate content on the website, then first replace or delete it. Also, if your website is infected with viruses, make it a priority to fix it.

Wait for a few days after fixing the issues. Even after a couple of weeks, if the website rankings are not recovered, then send a reconsideration request to Google in a polite manner.

Make sure to mention the reasons behind the issues and that you have fixed everything before sending a reconsideration request. Real users from the Google team will look into it and recover the indexing of the site. It can take 10 to 30 days. 

13. What SEO verticals have you worked on in your career?

When you are asked SEO interview questions about verticals, you should mention your areas of expertise in search engine optimization, and the top industries of your expertise.

SEO and digital marketing need expertise in specific industries or niches. Because the strategies will be different for every niche. For example, if you have the majority of SEO experience in EdTech sector, mention it. Also talk about the top projects in this niche for which you have driven results. 

14. How do you measure SEO success?

The success factors of an SEO project may vary on the type of business and its objectives. In general, these are the core metrics or key performance indicators (KPIs) to consider:

a) Keyword rankings

The primary keywords related to the products or services should be performing well. If you have brought most of the primary keywords on the first page of SERP, it is a success.

b) Monthly website traffic

There should be a significant rise in website traffic over time. It is a crucial metric as the motive behind first-page rankings is eventually to bring the relevant users to the website.

c) Click-through rate (CTR)

CTR is another important metric to measure the success of an SEO project. It is because if your keywords are ranking but significant traffic is not coming, then it means your CTR is poor. To improve this, the meta title and meta description need to be optimized. 

d) Bounce Rate

The bounce rate shows the percentage of visitors leaving the site without interacting or taking any action. If you have significantly reduced the bounce rate, it is a success factor.

e) Conversion Rate

The rate of visitors coming to your site and actually converting is the conversion rate. You can measure conversion on the basis of your goal, like users signing up for a newsletter, buying a product, submitting the inquiry form, etc. 

15. Why did Google rollout the Hummingbird update?

Google rolled out the Hummingbird update in 2013 as the biggest update to its algorithm since the inception of its search engine. 

The motive behind Google Hummingbird was to provide searchers with precise and more accurate results for their queries. The search engine giant focused on matching the search intent to the most relevant results.

Top SERP features like knowledge graph and semantic search were introduced as part of this algorithm. 

16. What was the motive of the Penguin update?

The motive of the Google Penguin algorithm was to reward great websites for their quality and offered value, while penalizing the sites that were manipulating the rankings.

Specifically, the Penguin update was harsh on the websites that were using link schemes and keyword stuffing. This update is still part of the core algorithm of Google.

17. What is your previous experience in managing an SEO or marketing team?

In this type of SEO manager interview questions, you need to mention your real experience. If you were in a managerial role already, talk about the team’s strength, the top projects you managed, and your strategy to manage the team over the main SEO tasks. 

18. What do you think are the duties and responsibilities of an SEO manager?

Here is a quick list of the SEO manager’s responsibilities:

  • Create solid SEO strategies and execute them
  • Manage a team of SEO Freshers, Executives, and Analysts
  • Provide timely keywords to the content writing teams
  • Conduct technical SEO audits and suggest fixes to the development team
  • Optimize website content
  • Work on off-page SEO techniques
  • Check and analyze website data like traffic, rankings, etc.
  • Coordinate with social media and PPC teams for better campaign results
  • Staying up-to-date with the latest SEO and digital marketing trends

19. Which are SEO factors that are out of your control?

Below is a list of SEO ranking factors that you can’t control:

  • Crawling and indexing time of new pages
  • Domain authority of the website
  • Updates in Google algorithm

20. How do you keep yourself updated with the latest trends in SEO?

The answers to such interview questions on SEO depend on your personal preference. If you follow any specific blog, SEO influencer, or YouTube channel, mention their names.

For example, I follow Search Engine Journal, WsCube Tech YouTube channel, and Neil Patel to keep myself up-to-date with the latest SEO trends and algorithm updates. 

Download SEO Interview Questions PDF Free!

We have also created a free PDF on SEO interview questions which you can download and prepare for the job in a convenient manner.

This PDF has 100+ top questions along with expert recommendations and advice for jumpstarting a career in search engine optimization. 

SEO Career FAQs

1. Who is an SEO Analyst?

An SEO Analyst is a part of the SEO team who works on analyzing the search engine optimization efforts, data analysis, and works closely with SEO Executives and other teams to improve the numbers.

The primary responsibilities of an SEO Analyst include:
a. Analysis of website structure, internal linking structure, etc.
b. Working on SEO strategies based on data.
c. Doing competitor research, collecting data, and checking the ranking & traffic on a given SEO project, including website, blog posts, product pages, etc.
d. Keeping track of different sources of website traffic, like social media traffic, referral traffic, organic traffic, etc.
e. Offering recommendations on reducing bounce rate and increasing session duration.

2. Who is SEO Specialist?

An SEO Specialist is an experienced person in the team who works on creating new strategies or revamping the existing SEO strategies for better results. 

The role of an SEO Specialist or Expert includes:
a. Crafting strategy for search engine optimization for driving traffic and improving keyword rankings
b. Coordinating with PPC team for well-execution of ad campaigns
c. Managing SEO budget, providing an estimated monthly budget for projects, and working accordingly
d. Collaborating with SEO Executives, content writers, and web developers for executing the project
e. Have skills in search engine marketing (SEM)
f. Creating backlink building strategies according to projects

3. Who is SEO Manager?

As the name suggests, SEO Manager is in charge of the projects and SEO team. It is a managerial role that demands not only high experience in the field, but also the ability to manage a team and multiple projects simultaneously.

4. How to learn SEO online?

You can learn SEO skills with reliable resources like the online SEO course by WsCube Tech.

5. What are some SEO interview questions for 4 years experience?

Below is a quick list of questions for candidates with 3-5 years of experience:
a. What are some things to know while building a backlink?
b. What is the difference between visits and views in Google Analytics?
c. What is cloaking?
d. Why use Google Search Console?
e. What is a schema or structured data in SEO?
f. What are doorway pages?
g. What are some good SEO plugins for WordPress?
h. How to improve domain authority?
i. What is the difference between a subdomain and a subdirectory?
j. What is the Google Pigeon update?
k. What is Google bombing?
l. What is link farming?
m. How to increase the page rank of a website?

6. What is the average SEO salary in India?

According to PayScale, the average salary of an SEO professional in India is around ₹285,875. The salary varies on the basis of skills, experience, as well as location of the company. 

7. Which companies are hiring SEO in India?

These are some of the top companies in India hiring for SEO roles:
– Amazon
– Bank Bazaar
– Sulekha
– NVIDIA
– Verizon
– Vedantu
– BYJU’S
– KFC
– Mindtree
– Thrillophillia
– Mphasis
– Zoho
– NP Digital
– Wipro

8. Which is the best YouTube channel for SEO?

If you want to learn SEO for free, then WsCube Tech is the best YouTube channel for you. You can find the detailed full course in Hindi. Here is the playlist. On the channel, you will also find videos on SEO interview questions and answers.

The post Top 108 SEO Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/seo-interview-questions/feed/ 0
Top 50+ PHP Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/php-interview-questions-answers/ https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/php-interview-questions-answers/#comments Mon, 02 Sep 2024 17:30:33 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=1528 The web development industry is growing at a fast pace over the last few years because of the norm of digitization. Whether you talk about eCommerce website development or dynamic web development, PHP lies at the heart of building flexible and functional sites.  This has given a rise to the demand for PHP developers in...

The post Top 50+ PHP Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

The web development industry is growing at a fast pace over the last few years because of the norm of digitization. Whether you talk about eCommerce website development or dynamic web development, PHP lies at the heart of building flexible and functional sites. 

This has given a rise to the demand for PHP developers in India and globally. Not only big brands and enterprises, but also web development agencies around the world are hiring skilled PHP developers.

The salary of a PHP developer in India is also lucrative. There is a skill gap between the demand and the number of skilled developers. By learning it with a practical web development course or PHP training, you can jumpstart your career in this field.

But before applying for a job, you must go through the most asked PHP interview questions and answers. It will help you crack the interview and get your dream job at the desired organization. 

In this comprehensive write-up, the series of questions will help you understand the complete concept of PHP. You can prepare for the job interview precisely and in the best way with these top-tier interview questions for PHP developers.

We have covered almost every question that is asked in an interview on PHP development. This article will also cover questions for a senior developer job profile as well. 

Introduction to PHP Programming Language

PHP stands for PHP Hypertext Preprocessor. It is an open-source scripting language widely used on the server-side.

PHP is mostly used for creating mobile APIs and dynamic websites. It is used for creating web pages and apps.

PHP programming language supports various databases like Oracle, MySQL, Solid, Sybase, PostgreSQL, etc. The code in PHP is embedded in HTML.

It is used to manage the tracking of any session on a server, managing dynamic content, managing databases, etc. Websites like e-commerce can also be created with PHP. Almost every web hosting server support PHP.

Things You Must Know Before Preparing for PHP Interview Questions

You should know what PHP is and what are the common areas where it is used. Along with the core PHP interview questions that will check your knowledge and skill set, you must also go through these things before going for the interview:

  • Know about the company
  • Go through common interview questions on PHP programming
  • Take mock interview
  • Build an appealing and professional web developer resume and print copies of it
  • Prepare some notes for fast revision of topics that are new to you
  • Ensure formal attire and professionalism 

Upskill Yourself With Live Training

Full Stack Web Development Course WordPress Course
Front-End Development Course MERN Stack Course

Basic PHP Interview Questions for Freshers

Go through these PHP interview questions and answers for freshers and experienced to get your desired job as a PHP developer. These questions are designed with the demand, and are generally asked in the hiring round.

1. What is PHP?

PHP stands for PHP Hypertext Preprocessor. It is a scripting language that is used for web development. It is an open-source language that is embedded into HTML. When a server executes the code, then the client gets a generated HTML.

2. Who is PHP Developer?

A PHP developer is a programmer who writes code at the server-side for web application logic. These programmers generally develop components that are supported at the back-end.

These developers connect the application with third-party web services and integrate the codes with the application to support the front-end web application logic.

3. Where is PHP used?

PHP is used on all the widely used operating systems like Windows, macOS, Linux, etc. PHP has support for web servers that are available in the market.

The dynamic web page content is generated with this. It is mainly used for web development. Developers prefer to use this language to build server-side webpages and applications.

4. Who developed PHP?

PHP was created by Rasmus Lerdorf, a Danish-Canadian developer, in 1994. All the new versions are produced by the PHP Group.

5. Name some big brands or top websites that use PHP.

Big names like Etsy, Facebook, Pinterest, Tumblr, WordPress, Wikipedia, etc. are using PHP as the back-end language.

6. What is PEAR in PHP?

PEAR in PHP stands for PHP Extension and Application Repository. It is a repository and framework that is used for reusing the PHP components.

PEAR enables the upgraded level of programming. It has various PHP libraries and code snippets. Moreover, it also contains a command-line interface for installing packages in PHP.

7. What are traits in PHP?

PHP traits are methods that allow the reuse of code. Traits are also used in a variety of languages that don’t have multiple inheritances. It is designed to overcome the limitations of inheritance in a program.

8. What are the disadvantages of PHP?

PHP is not used for big content-based web applications. It is also less secure because ASCII files are available everywhere, and it is an open-source language. 

More features of the PHP framework and tools cause poor performance of the application. PHP has a mediocre quality of handling errors.

9. Name some PHP-based CMS platforms.

WordPress, Joomla, Magento, and Drupal are some of the top Content Management Systems developed in PHP programming.

10. What is a final class in PHP?

It is used when an immutable class like a string class is created. In PHP, classes and methods can be declared final, but properties can not be declared final. A final keyword indicates that the method can not be overridden by subclasses.

11. What is the difference between unlink() and unset() functions in PHP?

The unlink() function is used for handling the file system. It deletes the file that is given as an entry. 

Whereas, the unset() function is used for managing variables. It makes a variable undefined.

12. What is the meaning of the PHP array operator ‘===’?

When both the sides have the same values or keys in the same order and have the same type, this type of operator is used.

13. Is PHP case-sensitive?

PHP is a partial case-sensitive language. The variables in PHP are case-sensitive, and functions are not case-sensitive. User-defined functions in PHP are also not case-sensitive.

14. What are print and echo in PHP language?

The echo in PHP can output one or more strings, and print can output only one. 

The echo is faster, and the print is slower.

15. How to set up a new database with PHP and MySQL?

A script is used to form a connection to the MySQL server. After verification of connection, it is checked by writing an example query. The queries are saved in a string variable, and then the constructed queries run.

16. How to find that a given variable is empty in PHP?

The empty() function is used to check if a variable in a program has any value or not.

17. What is MIME in PHP?

Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) is an extension of the email protocol. It can handle ASCII texts and SMTP on the internet as well as exchange various data files.

18. What is the main update in PHP 5 that was not in PHP 4?

PHP 5 has additional OOP (Object Oriented Programming) features that were not available in PHP 4.

19. What is the difference between PHP constants and variables?

The value of a constant in PHP can not be changed while a script is executing. But the value of a variable can be changed. 

A variable must start with a $, but there is no such condition for a constant.

PHP variable can be defined by a simple assignment but a constant is defined by the function ‘define()’.

20. What is the relationship between HTML and PHP?

HTML is generated with PHP scripts. PHP can receive information from HTML. It is a language that is based on the server-side, and HTML is a client-side language. PHP runs on the server and returns texts, arrays, and objects.

21. What are errors in PHP?

Errors in PHP are of 4 types.

  • Notices: These errors occur when a script is executed.
  • Warnings: execution of the script is not interrupted by this, and it can be viewed by default.
  • Syntax of parsing error: when a semicolon, quote mark, or parenthesis is missing in a program, this error takes place.
  • Fatal: It happens when the execution of the script is terminated.

22. Why is the use of foreach loop in PHP?

It is a looping construct in PHP that is used to loop and iterate through the array data type. With every pass, the element is assigned a value, and pointers are incremented.

23. What is include() function in PHP? 

The include() function is used to copy the content of a file called in the function. When the file can’t be found, it produces a warning.

24. What is require() function in PHP?

The require() function works same as include() function. It takes the file and copies the data into a file. When the file can’t be found, it produces a fatal error.

25. Explain session_start() function and session_destroy() function in PHP?

For starting a new session, session_start() function is used in PHP. It is also used to continue the existing session if the session was stopped earlier.

On the other hand, we use the session_destroy() function in PHP to end or destroy the active sessions. 

26. Which operator is used to concatenate two strings in PHP?

The dot(.) operator is used for the concatenation of two string variables together in PHP.

27. What is overriding and overloading in PHP?

Overriding is pertinent to derived classes in PHP. When a parent class defines a method and the derived class needs to override that particular method, the concept of overriding takes place.

When functions have similar signatures but different parameters, the concept of defining functions takes place. This process is called overloading in PHP.

28. What is the command line for executing a PHP script?

PHP Command Line Interface (CLI) is used to execute a PHP script. The command used for script execution is:

PHP script.php

29. What are image functions in PHP?

GD library is used to execute PHP image functions. The imagetypes() is also used to find out the image type and format that is also supported by the latest version of GD-PHP.

30. What are __wakeup and __sleep methods in PHP?

The __wakeup method in PHP is used to retrieve the array of all the variables.

On the other hand, the __sleep method is used to return the array of all the variables. These both are used for functions that are needed for saving the arrays.

31. How to find the number of rows that are returned in a result set and the number of entries affected by a query in PHP?

We can use the mysqli_affected_rows() function to return the total number of entries affected by an SQL query in PHP.

Also Read: 50+ JavaScript Interview Questions and Answers

32. What are the different types of arrays in PHP?

The array is of three types in PHP:

  • Indexed array: It basically is an array with a numeric key. Values in an indexed array are stored in a linear order.
  • Associative array: It is an array with strings for indexing elements. Values of elements are stored in association with key values.
  • Multidimensional array: It is an array with multiple arrays within itself. Values are accessed with the help of multiple indices.

33. What are some popular PHP frameworks?

These are some of the most used PHP frameworks:

  • Zend framework
  • Yii 2
  • CodeIgniter
  • Symfony
  • CakePHP

34. What is the basic role of the parser in PHP?

It is a library that is used to create the syntax tree of a source code. For this, the parser first passes the source code through a lexical analyzer, and then the syntax tree is formed. 

The benefit of using a PHP parser is that it helps in analyzing static code. Programmers or web developers can check the code for syntax errors and meet quality criteria.

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

DBMS Interview Questions Power BI Interview Questions
Java Interview Questions JavaScript Interview Questions
CSS Interview Questions Flutter Interview Questions
HTML Interview Questions NodeJS Interview Questions
MySQL Interview Questions ReactJS Interview Questions
Python Interview Questions C Programming Interview Questions
OOPS Interview Questions Data Structure Interview Questions

Advanced PHP Interview Questions for Experienced (Senior Developer)

If you know the basics of PHP and have been working as a developer for the past few years, you can go through these PHP interview questions and answers for experienced. These questions will be very helpful in checking your in-depth knowledge. 

1. What is PDO in PHP?

PDO stands for PHP Data Object. It is a PHP extension with a core PDO class and drivers that are database specific. PDO drivers can be accessed with the help of the PDO extension.

PHP PDO has a data-access abstraction layer. The function issues queries and fetches data without focusing on the database.

2. What is Path Traversal in PHP?

It is an attack to read the files of a web application. This attack is also called a dot-dot-slash (../) attack to climb to a higher-level directory. Path traversal in PHP is done to gain access to passwords and other sensitive information stored.

3. What do you understand by cURL in PHP?

It is a library in PHP that is used for making HTTP requests from the server. The Client URL or cURL allows users to connect to a URL and retrieve data from the HTML page, header, and other data.

4. What is the difference between $message and $$message in PHP?

$message is a regular variable, and data stored in this is fixed. 

Whereas, $$message is a reference variable, and data stored can be changed dynamically. 

$message has a fixed name, and the value stores a fixed value, but $$message stores variable data.

5. How to execute PHP with Apache/ Nginx?

Web servers are not designed to understand and parse PHP files. There are additional programs that are used to do that.

Here are some ways to execute PHP with Apache/ Nginx:

  • Mod_php: It means to use PHP as an Apache module.
  • FastCGI: It is a PHP process that interprets PHP code and not Apache.
  • PHP-FRM: It is an alternative FastCGI Process Manager (FPM), which is used on sites with heavy traffic.

6. What are php.ini and .htaccess files in PHP?

These files are used to make changes in PHP settings.

  • php.ini file: When PHP runs as CGI, these files are used. These files can be used as default settings or editing a PHP file.

  • .htaccess file: These files are used to change or manage the overall behavior of a site. These files work when PHP is installed as Apache Module. A site can redirect a domain’s page to one page to HTTP or www.

7. What is type juggling in PHP?

When the type of the variable is changed on the basis of the assigned value, it is called type juggling in PHP.

8. How to make cookies in PHP?

The cookie is a small piece of information stored in the client browser used to recognize the user. When a client requests to the server on a site, the cookie is embedded with the request in PHP.

The setcookie() function is used to make cookies in PHP. This function is called before any script output generation in PHP.

9. What is Smarty in PHP?

It is a template engine that is written in PHP. Smarty will include variables and operators to allow adaptability in the particular templates.

In PHP, Smarty is used to separate the concerns. It simplifies the program, which allows the front-end to change from its back-end.

10. What is the role of the lambda function used in PHP?

A lambda function is used to store the data into the variables and then pass that data to arguments for the usage in various other functions and methods.

This is also used to store data into variables. A user can see it as per the demand without defining it one more time.

11. How would you display the output of a program directly in the browser?

Special tags <?= and ?> are used to display output directly to the browser.

12. What is hashing password in PHP?

It is a method in PHP to transform a single password into a string with a hashed password. This process can only be done one way, and the hashed passwords can not be moved to the original ones. 

Hashing of passwords is done to improve the security of the program and the system. Some of the most used hashing algorithms in PHP are md5, bcrypt, sha1, and crypt.

13. What is Mbstring in PHP?

It is an extension that is used to handle strings that are non-ASCII. It provides multibyte-specific string functions used for multibyte encoding. If there are more than 256 characters present in a byte-wise coding system, multibyte character encoding schemes are used.

Mbstring handles encoding based on Unicode like UCS2 and UTF8. It is used to handle character encoding conversion between encoding pairs. 

Moreover, it has an overloading feature to add multibyte to string functions. It also provides multibyte-specific string functions that detect the beginning or ending of the multibyte characters.

14. What are ksort() and usort() functions in PHP?

Both the functions are used to sort associative arrays in PHP.

  • ksort(): It is a function that is used to sort arrays according to key values.
  • asort(): It is a function that is used to sort arrays according to their values.

15. What are GET and POST in PHP?

  • GET: It is used to display the data submitted as a part of the URL, and it allows only ASCII data. It can handle up to 2048 characters and is used to retrieve data.

  • POST: The information is not shown as per the request in the POST. It has no such request as a character limit, and binary data is also allowed in this. It is used to insert and update the data in PHP.

16. What is type hinting in PHP?

The type hinting was introduced in PHP 5. It is used to specify the data type for function declaration in PHP like arrays, objects, etc. 

When the function is not of a specified type, the run time will show an error, and the program will not be able to execute. It is used to organize the code better.

17. How to export data into Excel files in PHP?

With the help of a .csv file and using a separator between fields, data can be exported into Excel files in PHP.

18. What things would you consider before naming a variable in PHP?

Here are some of the rules you must follow before naming variables in PHP:

  • A variable in PHP must start with a $.
  • A variable in PHP must end with the name of the variable.
  • The first characters of the variable must be an underscore or a letter.
  • Variables are case-sensitive in PHP.
  • A variable name can have letters, digits, and underscores.
  • Special characters and spaces are not allowed.

OOPS in PHP Interview Questions

The concept of OOPS is used in PHP language, and here are some of the commonly asked object-oriented programming PHP interview questions for you. You can prepare with these questions as these are the most asked questions on the concept of OOPS.

1. What is OOPS in PHP?

When functions are used to perform operations in a program, it is called procedural PHP programming language. When objects are created with data and functions, it is called OOPS in PHP.

2. What is a class in PHP OOPs?

A class in OOPS decides the behavior of an object, as well as what an object can contain. Using the class, the programmers can create specific objects. 

The class is declared using the class keyword, along with the class name and curly braces.

Top Companies Hiring PHP Developers in India

The demand is on the rise for PHP developers as it is one of the most used languages. The regular updates in PHP are the main reason it won’t go out of demand.

If you are looking to build a career in PHP development, here is the list of top companies that are hiring PHP programmers and developers in India.

  • HCL Technologies
  • BirlaSoft
  • Wipro
  • Infosys
  • Sparx IT Solutions
  • Cognizant
  • Capgemini
  • Abservertech
  • Clarion Technologies
  • MindInventory
  • Mindster
  • PeerBits
  • Hidden Brains
  • Net Solutions
  • Parangat Technologies
  • Zealous Systems
  • Sphinx Solutions
  • IndiaNIC InfoTech
  • FinOit
  • IntellectSoft

What is the Average PHP Developer Salary in India?

The average salary of a PHP Developer in India is INR 2.88 LPA. With experience and level of skills, the salary increases.

The salary of a PHP developer also depends on the company location. For instance, companies in Bangalore, Pune, Chennai, Mumbai, etc. offer higher packages compared to tier II and tier III cities. 

In terms of career growth, this is a great field because the demand is increasing for this skill. You can also choose to become a freelance developer to get high-paying international projects. 

How to Learn PHP Online and Become a Skilled Developer?

There are plenty of sources available online for learning any skills and becoming a developer. You can choose an online web development course from a trusted institute like WsCube Tech, and learn PHP and web development practically.

The online PHP training by WsCube Tech covers the complete curriculum in detail with regular live classes by an expert trainer. Along with learning, you also get to work on live PHP projects for practical exposure and experience. 

On course completion, you earn your professional certification and get assistance in job placement at top companies. 

FAQs Related to Interview Questions on PHP

Here are some of the most asked questions that are generally asked regarding PHP. It will clear your queries related to the PHP programming career.

What are career opportunities in PHP?

The scope of PHP is very good as almost 80% of the websites use PHP as a development language. It is a decent career with constant growth that will land you in a pool full of opportunities as a developer.

Is PHP still in demand?

Yes, PHP is still in demand, and it is not going out of demand anytime soon. The regular updates in PHP are one of the main reasons it will stay relevant in the near future as well in the sector of development.

How can I start a career in PHP?

You can purchase a PHP course from WsCube Tech and work on your skills. After the skill development, you can take the help of these interview questions to prepare for the interview. You can start a decent career in development in PHP after cracking the interview.

What are the skills required to become a PHP developer?

Here are some of the top skills that are required to become a PHP developer:
– Knowledge of Ajax, MySQL, and jQuery
– Framework of CakePHP
– Knowledge of APIs and Linux/ UNIX
– Knowledge of MVC framework architecture
If you are working on becoming a full-stack developer, then knowledge of CSS, HTML, and JavaScript is also needed.

Why is PHP used for web development?

PHP is used to create dynamic content and interact with databases in a website. It is known for the simplicity of the code, flexibility, speed, etc.

Is PHP difficult to learn?

It is not a tough language to learn. You can learn this language with ease if you know the basics of programming. Purchase an online course and learn complete PHP.

How long does it take to learn PHP?

You can learn PHP in three to six months. It completely depends on the commitment. You can learn PHP from a course from WsCube Tech in three months.

The post Top 50+ PHP Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/php-interview-questions-answers/feed/ 1
50+ Angular Interview Questions and Answers (2025) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/angular-interview-questions/ Sat, 10 Aug 2024 17:40:17 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=2719 Siddharth, an experienced web developer, had always dreamt of working at his dream company. He knew that the interview process would be tough, and he had to be fully prepared.  When he was a beginner, he completed his online web development course and worked for a couple of years at a startup. Next, he applied...

The post 50+ Angular Interview Questions and Answers (2025) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

Siddharth, an experienced web developer, had always dreamt of working at his dream company. He knew that the interview process would be tough, and he had to be fully prepared. 

When he was a beginner, he completed his online web development course and worked for a couple of years at a startup. Next, he applied for a job at the organization of his dream and appeared for an interview.

Before going for it, he made sure to prepare himself well for all types of interview questions. He visited the WsCube Tech blog and went through the list of Angular interview questions and answers

Since, he was applying for a full-stack developer job, he also went through:

When he was asked questions related to AngularJS, he felt confident, as he had prepared well using the guide provided by WsCube Tech. 

At one point, the interviewer asked him a particularly tricky question, and he didn’t know the answer. Siddharth used his humour, “I may not know the answer to that, but I do know how to make a killer cup of coffee!”

The interviewer laughed, and Siddharth’s nerves dissipated. He ended up cracking the interview and getting the job. And, as an added bonus, he also got to share his coffee-making skills with his new colleagues.

Not the end of the story!

If you are also looking for the top AngularJS interview questions and answers, then we have created an in-depth guide for you. Like Siddharth, you will be on your way to cracking even the most difficult questions with this write-up on the common interview questions on AngularJS.

This guide is all the more relevant for you, if you have some experience in web development.

So, let’s get started and create yet another success story!

Upskill Yourself With Live Training

Full Stack Web Development Course WordPress Course
Front-End Development Course MERN Stack Course

Angular Interview Questions for 3 Years Experience

Here are the common AngularJS interview questions and answers for 3 years experienced developer:

1.What is AngularJS?

Angular is a popular open-source front-end web application framework, developed and maintained by Google. It is used to build dynamic and interactive web applications that can run in a web browser. 

It simplifies the development process by providing developers with a set of tools and features, such as two-way data binding, directives, templates, and dependency injection. 

It follows the Model-View-Controller (MVC) architecture pattern, which separates the application logic into three distinct components: the model (data), the view (user interface), and the controller (logic). 

Whether you are a beginner or an experienced professional, the definition can be asked as one of the top Angular interview questions.

2. What are the key features of AngularJS?

The primary Angular features include:

a) Two-way data binding

It allows for automatic synchronization between the data model and the view, meaning that changes made to the data are immediately reflected in the view, and vice versa.

b) Dependency Injection

Angular makes use of dependency injection to create more modular and maintainable code. This allows developers to easily inject dependencies into components and services, making it easier to manage the codebase.

c) Directives

It provides a set of built-in directives that allow developers to easily manipulate the DOM and create reusable components. Directives are used to add behavior to HTML elements, such as showing or hiding elements, adding or removing classes, and more.

d) Templating

AngularJS uses HTML templates to define the user interface of an application. These templates can be easily customized and updated as needed, and can be reused across multiple pages or components.

e) MVC Architecture

AngularJS follows the Model-View-Controller (MVC) architecture pattern, which separates the application logic into three distinct components: the model (data), the view (user interface), and the controller (logic).

f) Testing

It provides built-in support for unit testing, making it easier to ensure that an application is functioning correctly and to catch bugs early in the development process.

g) Routing

It offers a powerful routing system that allows developers to easily define the routes of an application and handle navigation between pages or views.

3. How does AngularJS differ from other front-end frameworks like ReactJS and Vue.js?

AngularJS, React, and Vue.js are all popular front-end frameworks used to build dynamic and interactive web applications. 

Here are some key differences between AngularJS and the other two frameworks:

Framework Architecture Data Binding Directives
AngularJS MVC Two-way data binding Yes, used to manipulate the DOM and create reusable components
ReactJS Component-based One-way data flow No, uses a virtual DOM and a template-based approach
VueJS Component-based One-way data flow Yes, used to manipulate the DOM and create reusable components

Related Reading: ReactJS Interview Questions and Answers

4. What is the difference between one-way binding and two-way binding in AngularJS?

Data binding is a technique used to synchronize data between the model (data) and the view (user interface). 

Here are the differences between one-way and two-way binding:

One-Way Binding Two-Way Binding
Data Flow One direction: from model to view Two directions: from model to view and from view to model
Model to View Changes in the model update the view Changes in the model update the view
View to Model Changes in the view do not update the model Changes in the view update the model
Syntax {{ }} syntax ngModel directive
Usage When data is not expected to change frequently or the view is not interactive When data is expected to change frequently or the view is interactive
Efficiency Can be simpler and more efficient Can be more complex and less efficient

If you have been using Angular for quite some time now, then knowing the answers to such AngularJS interview questions is crucial. 

5. What is a directive in AngularJS? 

A directive is a reusable component that can be added to HTML elements to provide additional functionality. 

It can be used to manipulate the DOM, create custom HTML elements, add behaviour to existing elements, and more. These are defined using the directive method of the AngularJS module, and can be used in HTML using the directive name as an attribute.

6. Give an example of a built-in directive in AngularJS.

Here is an example of a built-in directive in AngularJS:

<div ng-repeat="item in items">

  {{item.name}}

</div>

Here, the ng-repeat directive is used to repeat the contents of the <div> element for each item in the items array. The directive takes an expression (item in items) that specifies how to repeat the contents, and uses it to generate multiple copies of the element with different data. 

In this case, the {{item.name}} expression is evaluated for each item in the items array, and displays the name property of each item.

7. What is dependency injection in Angular? How is it useful?

Dependency injection is a design pattern used to manage dependencies between different components of an application. 

It is the process of providing a dependent object with the objects it needs to function, rather than having the dependent object create those objects itself. It is implemented using the $injector service, which is responsible for resolving dependencies and providing the necessary objects to components.

Dependency injection is useful in several ways:

Modularity

Dependency injection promotes modularity by allowing components to be developed and tested in isolation. This makes it easier to maintain and update the code, as each component can be developed and tested independently.

Reusability

By injecting dependencies into a component, it becomes easier to reuse that component in different parts of the application, or even in different applications.

Testability

Dependency injection makes it easier to test components, as the dependencies can be easily mocked or replaced with test doubles.

Separation of concerns

By separating the creation of objects from their use, dependency injection helps to separate concerns and promote cleaner, more maintainable code.

8. How do you handle errors in AngularJS?

Errors can be handled using several techniques:

a) Exception Handling

Angular provides a built-in exception handler service $exceptionHandler, which can be used to handle exceptions that occur during the execution of an AngularJS application. 

This service can be used to log errors, display error messages to the user, or perform other error-handling tasks.

b) Promises

It is a powerful feature of Angular that can be used to handle errors in asynchronous code. Promises allow developers to handle errors in a consistent way across the entire application, and provide a way to propagate errors up the call stack.

c) Interceptors

These allow developers to intercept and modify HTTP requests and responses. Interceptors can be used to handle errors that occur during HTTP requests, and can be used to provide consistent error handling across the entire application.

d) Custom Error Handling

In addition to the built-in error-handling mechanisms provided by AngularJS, developers can also implement custom error-handling logic in their applications. This can include custom error messages, logging, and other error-handling tasks.

It is one of the most asked Angular interview questions. Make sure to be prepared well for it. 

9. Explain the concept of services in AngularJS. 

Services in Angular are objects that are used to organize and share code across different components of an application. These are used to provide functionality that can be shared across different controllers, directives, filters, and other services.

A built-in example of a service in AngularJS is the $http service. It is used to make HTTP requests to a server and returns a promise that is resolved with the response data from the server. This service is commonly used to fetch data from a server and update the application’s state accordingly.

10. Give an example of a built-in service in Angular.

Here’s an example of how to use the $http service in AngularJS:

angular.module('myApp', [])

  .controller('myCtrl', function($http) {

    $http.get('/api/data').then(function(response) {

      // handle the response data here

    }, function(error) {

      // handle the error here

    });

  });

In this example, the $http service is injected into the myCtrl controller, and is used to make a GET request to the /api/data endpoint. When the request is successful, the then method is called with the response data, which can be used to update the application’s state. 

If an error occurs, the catch method is called with the error object, which can be used to handle the error appropriately.

11. What is the purpose of ng-repeat in AngularJS? Give an example.

The ng-repeat directive is used to repeat a set of HTML elements for each item in an array or an object. The purpose of ng-repeat is to create dynamic content based on the data provided by the controller.

Example

Here is an example of how ng-repeat can be used to generate a list of items in an HTML template:

<div ng-controller="myCtrl">

  <ul>

    <li ng-repeat="item in items">{{item}}</li>

  </ul>

</div>

Here, ng-repeat is used to iterate over an array of items in the $scope.items object and generate an HTML list element for each item. The syntax item in items specifies that each item in the items array should be assigned to the item variable during each iteration. The double curly braces {{item}} indicate that the value of the item should be interpolated into the HTML template.

Suppose the $scope.items array contains the following values: [‘apple’, ‘banana’, ‘orange’]. The resulting HTML output generated by ng-repeat would be:

<div ng-controller="myCtrl">

  <ul>

    <li>apple</li>

    <li>banana</li>

    <li>orange</li>

  </ul>

</div>

This is just a basic example, but ng-repeat can be used for more complex scenarios, such as generating tables, nested lists, or even custom directives.

Suggested Reading: Java Interview Questions and Answers

12. Explain the concept of digest cycle in AngularJS.

The digest cycle is a process that keeps track of changes to a scope and updates the view accordingly. It is triggered automatically by Angular whenever it detects a change to the model, which could be the result of user input or updates made by the application logic.

The digest cycle consists of several steps, which are executed in order until all changes have been detected and applied:

a) Dirty checking: 

Angular checks the current state of the model to see if any values have changed since the last digest cycle.

b) Watchers

AngularJS iterates through all registered watchers, which are functions that are called whenever a specific model value changes. These watchers may update other parts of the model, which triggers additional digest cycles.

c) Model update: 

If any changes are detected during the previous steps, AngularJS updates the model with the new values.

d) View update: 

AngularJS updates the view to reflect any changes to the model.

The digest cycle continues until no further changes are detected, at which point the cycle is complete.

The digest cycle is an essential part of AngularJS because it ensures that the view is always up-to-date with the model. Without the digest cycle, changes made to the model would not be reflected in the view, and the application would not behave as expected.

While preparing for Angular interview questions and answers for experienced professional, you can’t ignore core topics like the digest cycle. 

13. What are filters in AngularJS? 

Filters are functions that can be used to format and transform data within a view. Filters are applied to expressions using the | character, and they can be chained together to create more complex transformations.

AngularJS provides several built-in filters that can be used out of the box, such as:

  • currency: formats a number as a currency string.
  • date: formats a date object into a string.
  • filter: filters an array based on a given criteria.
  • orderBy: orders an array by a specified property.

Custom filters can also be defined by creating a new filter factory function using the filter() method on the module object. 

Example

For example, the following code defines a custom filter that capitalizes the first letter of a string:

angular.module('myApp', []).filter('capitalize', function() {

  return function(input) {

    if (input) {

      return input.charAt(0).toUpperCase() + input.slice(1);

    }

    return input;

  };

});

Once defined, the capitalize filter can be used in an expression like this:

{{ myString | capitalize }}

Filters can also accept arguments by including them in the expression after the filter name, separated by a colon. For example:

{{ myDate | date:'yyyy-MM-dd' }}

This applies the date filter to myDate, using the format string ‘yyyy-MM-dd’.

14. Give an example of a built-in filter.

An example of a built-in filter in Angular is the currency filter. This filter formats a number into a currency string based on the locale specified in the application.

Example

Here’s an example usage of the currency filter:

<p>{{ price | currency }}</p>

Here, price is a variable in the current scope that contains a number, such as 42.99. When the currency filter is applied to price, it formats the number as a currency string based on the default locale.

For example, if the default locale is set to US English, the output of the above expression would be:

<p>$42.99</p>

The currency filter can also take an optional argument to specify the currency symbol, as well as other options such as the number of decimal places to include.

Here’s an example that specifies the currency symbol as “€” and sets the decimal places to 2:

<p>{{ price | currency:'€':2 }}</p>

In this case, assuming price is still 42.99, the output would be:

<p>€42.99</p>

15. What is the difference between ng-show and ng-hide in AngularJS?

ng-show and ng-hide are two directives used to show or hide elements in the view based on a condition.

The primary difference between ng-show and ng-hide is in the way they work:

  • ng-show displays the element only when the expression provided to it evaluates to a truthy value, and hides the element otherwise. The element’s CSS display property is set to none when the expression is false.

  • ng-hide, on the other hand, hides the element only when the expression provided to it evaluates to a truthy value, and displays the element otherwise. The element’s CSS display property is set to none when the expression is true.

So, the main difference between these two directives is that ng-show hides the element when the expression is false, while ng-hide hides the element when the expression is true.

Example

Here’s an example usage of ng-show:

<div ng-show="showElement">

  This element is visible when showElement is true.

</div>

Here, the div element is displayed only when the expression showElement is truthy.

And here’s an example usage of ng-hide:

<div ng-hide="hideElement">

  This element is visible when hideElement is false.

</div>

Here, the div element is displayed only when the expression hideElement is falsy.

While going to any organization for job, you must ensure to have answers to this type of interview questions on AngularJS for experienced professionals. 

16. What is a module in AngularJS? Why is it important?

A module is a container for different parts of an application, such as controllers, services, directives, filters, etc. It is defined using angular.module() method and can depend on other modules.

Here’s an example of defining a module in AngularJS:

angular.module('myApp', []);

Here, the angular.module() method is used to create a new module named ‘myApp’. The second argument, an empty array, specifies that this module has no dependencies on other modules.

Modules are important in AngularJS because they provide a way to organize an application into discrete, reusable components. By separating the different parts of an application into modules, developers can more easily manage and maintain their code.

For example, one module may contain the controllers and templates for a particular feature of the application, while another module may contain the services and filters used throughout the application. These modules can be loaded and used independently of each other, which makes it easier to write modular and testable code.

Modules also provide a way to manage dependencies between different parts of an application. By declaring dependencies on other modules, an AngularJS module can use the components defined in those modules.

17. Explain the concept of scope in AngularJS.

A scope is an object that acts as the binding between the view and the controller in the application. The scope is responsible for storing the model data and functions used in the view, and for notifying the view of changes in the model data.

Every Angular application has a root scope, which is created when the application is initialized. Each controller in the application has its own scope, which is created when the controller is instantiated. The child scope inherits properties and methods from its parent scope, and can also define its own properties and methods.

Here’s an example of using scope in AngularJS:

angular.module('myApp', [])

  .controller('myController', function($scope) {

    $scope.greeting = 'Hello, World!';

  });

In this example, a new module called ‘myApp’ is created with a controller called ‘myController’. The $scope object is injected into the controller function, which allows us to define properties on the scope. In this case, we define a property called greeting with the value ‘Hello, World!’.

In the view, we can use the ng-controller directive to attach the ‘myController’ controller to an element, and then use the {{}} syntax to bind the greeting property to the view:

<div ng-app="myApp" ng-controller="myController">

  <p>{{greeting}}</p>

</div>

When the view is rendered, AngularJS will replace the {{greeting}} expression with the value of the greeting property on the scope, which is ‘Hello, World!’.

18. How to use ng-model in Angular?

ng-model is a directive used to bind the data in an input, select, or textarea element to a property on the scope. This allows the data to be synchronized between the view and the model.

Example of using ng-model in a text input:

<input type="text" ng-model="name">

Here, the ng-model directive is attached to the input element, and the value of the input will be bound to the $scope.name property in the controller.

Example of using ng-model in a select element:

<select ng-model="color">

  <option value="red">Red</option>

  <option value="green">Green</option>

  <option value="blue">Blue</option>

</select>

In this example, the ng-model directive is attached to the select element, and the selected option will be bound to the $scope.color property in the controller.

Example of using ng-model in a textarea element:

<textarea ng-model="message"></textarea>

In this example, the ng-model directive is attached to the textarea element, and the content of the textarea will be bound to the $scope.message property in the controller.

19. What are the differences between $watch and $observe in AngularJS?

$watch and $observe are two methods that are used to monitor changes to model data and attributes in the DOM, respectively.

Here are the main differences between $watch and $observe:

Use case: 

$watch is typically used to monitor changes to model data on the scope, while $observe is used to monitor changes to attributes on a DOM element.

Syntax: 

$watch is a method that is called on a scope object, while $observe is a method that is called on an attribute directive.

Execution time: 

$watch is executed during the digest cycle, which is triggered whenever the AngularJS framework detects a change to the model data. $observe, on the other hand, is executed when the attribute value changes, which can be triggered by a change in the scope or by a change to the attribute itself.

Callback function: 

Both $watch and $observe take a callback function as an argument that is executed when the value being monitored changes. The difference is that the $watch callback function is passed the new and old values of the model data being monitored, while the $observe callback function is only passed the new value of the attribute being monitored.

Feature $watch $observe
Use case Monitors changes to model data on the scope. Monitors changes to attributes on a DOM element.
Syntax Method called on a scope object. Method called on an attribute directive.
Execution time Executed during the digest cycle. Executed when the attribute value changes.
Callback function Passed new and old values of the model data. Passed only the new value of the attribute being monitored.

20. What is transclusion in AngularJS? How do you use it?

Transclusion is a technique for including content from a directive’s template into the parent element’s template while preserving the original scope context of the directive.

It is used to create reusable components that can be used in different parts of an application with different content. It allows developers to define a template for a directive and insert it into different locations in the parent template.

To use transclusion in AngularJS, you need to define a directive with a transclude option set to true. This tells AngularJS to include any content between the opening and closing tags of the directive element in the directive’s template.

This is one of the top Angular interview questions. So, prepare well for it.

21. What is the difference between $http and $resource in AngularJS?

Here’s a tabular comparison showing the difference between $http and $resource in Angular:

Feature $http $resource
Data Format Supports XML, JSON, Text, and HTML data formats. Supports JSON data format.
RESTful Interactions Provides basic HTTP request methods: GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, PATCH, and HEAD. Designed to interact with RESTful web services using HTTP request methods: GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, and HEAD.
Configuration Options Provides a wide range of configuration options. Provides a smaller set of configuration options.
Resource Objects Does not provide resource objects. Provides resource objects that can be used to interact with RESTful web services.
URL Templating Does not provide URL templating. Provides URL templating for defining RESTful API endpoints.
Caching Mechanism Provides a caching mechanism for HTTP requests. Does not provide a caching mechanism for HTTP requests.
Complex Query Parameters Can be used to send complex query parameters with HTTP requests. Can be used to send complex query parameters with HTTP requests.

22. What is the difference between $emit and $broadcast in AngularJS?

Here’s a tabular comparison showing the difference between $emit and $broadcast in Angular:

Feature $emit $broadcast
Direction Emits an event upwards through the scope hierarchy. Broadcasts an event downwards to all child scopes.
Scope Only the current scope and its ancestors receive the event. All child scopes receive the event.
Event Propagation The event can be stopped from propagating further up. The event cannot be stopped from propagating further down.
Performance Performance is better than $broadcast for large scope trees. Performance may be slower for large scope trees.
Use Case Used when only specific scopes need to receive the event. Used when all child scopes need to receive the event.

23. What are promises in Angular?

Promises are used for asynchronous operations that take some time to complete, such as fetching data from a server or reading a file. These provide a way to handle such operations without blocking the execution of other code in the application.

A promise represents the eventual result of an asynchronous operation and can have three states:

  • Pending: The initial state, the operation has not yet been completed.
  • Fulfilled: The operation was completed successfully, and the promise has a result value.
  • Rejected: The operation failed, and the promise has a reason for the failure.

A promise object has two methods: 

  • then(): It is called when the promise is fulfilled and takes two callback functions as arguments. The first callback is called when the operation succeeds, and the second is called when the operation fails.
  • catch(): It is called when the promise is rejected and takes a callback function as an argument.

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

DBMS Interview Questions Power BI Interview Questions
Java Interview Questions JavaScript Interview Questions
CSS Interview Questions Flutter Interview Questions
HTML Interview Questions NodeJS Interview Questions
MySQL Interview Questions ReactJS Interview Questions
Python Interview Questions C Programming Interview Questions
OOPS Interview Questions Data Structure Interview Questions

Angular Interview Questions for 5 Years Experience

Here, we are going to know the top Angular interview questions and answers for 5 years experienced professionals. 

24. Explain the AngularJS component-based architecture.

The component-based architecture in Angular is a way of building web applications by breaking them down into smaller, reusable parts called components. A component is a self-contained, modular unit of code that encapsulates a specific functionality or feature of the application.

A component is defined using a combination of a template, a controller, and a set of bindings. The template is an HTML file that defines the component’s view, while the controller is a JavaScript file that defines the component’s behavior. The bindings allow data to be passed between the view and the controller.

Example

Here’s an example of defining a simple component in AngularJS:

angular.module('myApp')

  .component('myComponent', {

    templateUrl: 'my-component.html',

    controller: function() {

      var vm = this;

      vm.message = 'Hello, world!';

    }

  });

Here, the component() method is used to define a new component called myComponent. The templateUrl property specifies the HTML template file that defines the component’s view, while the controller property defines the JavaScript code that implements the component’s behavior. The vm variable is used to store the component’s data and functions, which are made available to the view via the bindings.

Related Reading: JavaScript Interview Questions and Answers

25. What are benefits of component-based architecture of Angular?

The advantages of using a component-based architecture in AngularJS include:

Reusability: 

Components can be easily reused in different parts of the application, reducing duplication of code and increasing development efficiency.

Separation of Concerns: 

Components separate the concerns of the view and the logic, making the code more organized and easier to maintain.

Modularity: 

Components allow the application to be broken down into smaller, manageable pieces, making it easier to develop, test, and deploy.

Encapsulation: 

Components encapsulate their own state and behavior, making them more predictable and less prone to side effects or conflicts with other parts of the application.

This is one of the top Angular interview questions in 2023.

26. How to implement server-side rendering in Angular?

Server-side rendering (SSR) is the process of rendering web pages on the server instead of the client. Implementing SSR can improve the performance and SEO of the application, as well as provide a better user experience.

Here are the steps to implement Angular server-side rendering:

a) Create a new AngularJS application using the Angular CLI:

ng new my-app --skip-install

b) Install the @nguniversal/express-engine and @nguniversal/module-map-ngfactory-loader packages:

npm install @nguniversal/express-engine @nguniversal/module-map-ngfactory-loader

c) Create a new file called server.ts in the root of the application with the following code:

import 'zone.js/dist/zone-node';

import * as express from 'express';

import { ngExpressEngine } from '@nguniversal/express-engine';

import { provideModuleMap } from '@nguniversal/module-map-ngfactory-loader';

import { enableProdMode } from '@angular/core';

const app = express();

const { AppServerModuleNgFactory, LAZY_MODULE_MAP } = require('./dist/server/main');

enableProdMode();

app.engine('html', ngExpressEngine({

  bootstrap: AppServerModuleNgFactory,

  providers: [

    provideModuleMap(LAZY_MODULE_MAP)

  ]

}));

app.set('view engine', 'html');

app.set('views', 'dist/browser');

app.use(express.static('dist/browser'));

app.get('*', (req, res) => {

  res.render('index', { req });

});

app.listen(3000, () => {

  console.log('Listening on port 3000');

});

In the code above, we’re using the ngExpressEngine function from @nguniversal/express-engine to render AngularJS templates on the server. 

We’re also using the provideModuleMap function from @nguniversal/module-map-ngfactory-loader to provide a map of lazy-loaded modules.

d) Build the application for production:

ng build --prod

This will generate a dist folder with the compiled application.

e) Build the server-side bundle:

ng run my-app:server

This will generate a dist/server folder with the server-side bundle.

f) Start the server:

node dist/server.js

This will start the server on port 3000.

With server-side rendering implemented, when a user requests a page, the server will render the page and send the HTML to the client, along with the necessary JavaScript and CSS files. 

The client will then hydrate the page and add any necessary interactivity. This can improve the performance of the application, as the user doesn’t have to wait for the JavaScript to download and execute before seeing the content.

27. What is lazy loading in AngularJS? 

Lazy loading is a technique used to load modules and components on demand, instead of loading everything upfront when the application starts. This can improve the performance of the application, as it reduces the initial load time and only loads the modules and components that are actually needed.

In lazy loading, modules are split into smaller, more manageable chunks called “feature modules”, and components are grouped into these feature modules based on their functionality. 

When a user navigates to a specific feature, the associated feature module is loaded on demand. This can be done using the loadChildren property in the routing configuration.

28. What is change detection in Angular?

Change detection is a core feature that is responsible for detecting changes to the application’s data and updating the view accordingly. It is the mechanism by which AngularJS tracks changes to the application state and updates the view to reflect those changes.

The change detection works by comparing the current view state to the previous view state and updating the view only where necessary. 

The process of change detection involves the following steps:

  • AngularJS creates a component tree to represent the application’s view hierarchy.
  • The framework sets up a change detection mechanism for each component, which includes a watchlist of properties to monitor for changes.
  • Whenever an event occurs that could potentially trigger a change in the view, AngularJS triggers a change detection cycle.
  • During the change detection cycle, the framework checks each component’s watchlist for changes.
  • If a change is detected, AngularJS updates the component’s view and any child components that depend on the changed data.

There are two modes of change detection in AngularJS: default change detection and on-push change detection. 

In default change detection, AngularJS checks all components in the tree for changes during each change detection cycle. 

In on-push change detection, AngularJS only checks components for changes if their inputs have changed or if an event has occurred that could potentially trigger a change.

29. How to use internationalization (i18n) in an Angular application?

To implement i18n in an Angular application, you can use the built-in AngularJS i18n support, which allows you to define translation files for different languages and use them in your application.

Here are the steps to follow:

a) Install the AngularJS i18n module:

npm install angular-i18n

b) Define the translation files:

Create a separate JSON file for each language you want to support. For example, for English, you might create a file called en.json, and for French, you might create a file called fr.json. The files should contain key-value pairs for each string that needs to be translated. 

For example, for English, you might have:

{

    "greeting": "Hello",

    "message": "Welcome to my application"

}

And for French, you might have:

{

    "greeting": "Bonjour",

    "message": "Bienvenue sur mon application"

}

c) Load the translation files:

In your AngularJS application, load the translation files using the $translateProvider service. 

For example:

angular.module('myApp', ['pascalprecht.translate'])

    .config(['$translateProvider', function ($translateProvider) {

        $translateProvider.useStaticFilesLoader({

            prefix: 'i18n/',

            suffix: '.json'

        });

        $translateProvider.preferredLanguage('en');

        $translateProvider.useSanitizeValueStrategy('escaped');

    }]);

This code tells AngularJS to load the translation files from the i18n/ directory and use the .json extension. It also sets the default language to English (‘en’) and specifies that the translation strings should be escaped for security (‘escaped’).

Here’s a tabular comparison showing the main differences between NgZone and ChangeDetectorRef:

To use the translation strings in your code, you can use the $translate service. 

For example:

angular.module('myApp').controller('MyController', ['$translate', function ($translate) {

    var greeting = $translate.instant('greeting');

    var message = $translate.instant('message');

    console.log(greeting + ' ' + message);

}]);

The $translate.instant method takes a translation key as a parameter and returns the translated string.

By following these steps, you should be able to implement i18n in your AngularJS application and support multiple languages.

30. How to implement unit testing in an AngularJS application using Jasmine and Karma?

To use unit testing in an AngularJS application using Jasmine and Karma, follow these steps:

a) Set up your development environment:

Install Node.js and NPM (Node Package Manager) on your machine. 

Once you have Node.js and NPM installed, you can use NPM to install Karma and Jasmine globally by running the following command in your terminal:

npm install -g karma jasmine

b) Create a Karma configuration file:

module.exports = function(config) {

    config.set({

        basePath: '',

        frameworks: ['jasmine'],

        files: [

            'path/to/angular.js',

            'path/to/angular-mocks.js',

            'path/to/your/tests/**/*.js'

        ],

        exclude: [],

        preprocessors: {},

        reporters: ['progress'],

        port: 9876,

        colors: true,

        logLevel: config.LOG_INFO,

        autoWatch: true,

        browsers: ['Chrome'],

        singleRun: false,

        concurrency: Infinity

    })

}

This file sets up Karma with the Jasmine testing framework, specifies the location of the AngularJS and Angular Mocks libraries, and specifies the location of your test files.

One can learn NodeJS with an online MERN Stack course to upskill and enhance the career.

c) Write your tests:

In your Angular project directory, create a folder named tests (or any other name you prefer) to store your test files. 

Create test files for each component or service you want to test, using the Jasmine syntax. 

For example:

describe('MyService', function() {

    var myService;

    beforeEach(module('myApp'));

    beforeEach(inject(function(_MyService_) {

        myService = _MyService_;

    }));

    it('should return the correct message', function() {

        expect(myService.getMessage()).toEqual('Hello, world!');

    });

});

This code creates a Jasmine test suite for a service named MyService and tests that the getMessage method returns the correct message.

d) Run your tests:

In your terminal, navigate to your Angular project directory and run the following command:

karma start

This will start Karma and run your tests in the Chrome browser (as specified in the karma.conf.js file). You should see the results of your tests in the terminal.

By following these steps, you should be able to implement unit testing in your AngularJS application using Jasmine and Karma.

Suggested Reading: Django Interview Questions and Answers

31. What is the difference between ngFor and ngIf in AngularJS?

Here is the tabular presentation of all the primary differences between ngFor vs nglf in Angular:

ngFor ngIf
Used to repeat a block of HTML for each item in an array or iterable object Used to conditionally render a block of HTML based on a boolean expression
Syntax: *ngFor=”let item of items” Syntax: *ngIf=”condition”
Creates a new instance of the template for each item in the array Only creates the template instance if the condition is true
Can be used with any iterable object, such as arrays, maps, and sets Can be used with any boolean expression
Requires a unique identifier for each item in the array using trackBy Does not require any additional configuration
Can be used with structural directives like ngSwitch and ngTemplateOutlet Can be used with structural directives like ngSwitch and ngTemplateOutlet
Used to render a list of items Used to conditionally render a block of HTML
Can result in a large number of DOM elements being created if the array is large Does not result in a large number of DOM elements being created if the condition is false
Generally used with an <ng-container> element to avoid adding unnecessary elements to the DOM Can be used with any HTML element

32. How to implement form validation in AngularJS?

You can implement form validation using the built-in form validation directives and the ngModel directive. 

Here are the steps to do so:

  1. Add the ng-app directive to the HTML element to initialize the AngularJS application.
  2. Add the ng-controller directive to the HTML element to define the controller for the view.
  3. Use the ng-form directive to define the form element.
  4. Add the name attribute to the form element to identify the form in the controller.
  5. Use the ng-model directive to bind the form elements to the scope variables.
  6. Use the built-in validation directives such as ng-required, ng-pattern, ng-minlength, ng-maxlength, etc. to validate the form input.
  7. Use the ng-show or ng-hide directives to show or hide error messages based on the validation results.
  8. Add the ng-submit directive to the form element to call the controller function when the form is submitted.
  9. In the controller, define a function that handles the form submission.
  10. Use the $valid property of the form object to check if the form is valid.
  11. If the form is valid, submit the form data to the server. If the form is invalid, display error messages.

33. What is the difference between reactive forms and template-driven forms in AngularJS?

Here are some tips to optimize the performance of an Angular app handling large datasets:

Reactive Forms Template-Driven Forms
More flexible and scalable, especially for complex forms. Simpler and quicker to create, but less scalable for larger and complex forms.
Forms are created programmatically using reactive form classes and objects. Forms are created declaratively in HTML using directives.
Provides a more explicit and intuitive way to manage form data, validation, and submission. Validation is based on HTML attributes and directives, which can be limiting and harder to customize.
Reactive forms separate the model and the view by using reactive form classes, which represent the form data and its behavior. The model and view are tightly coupled, which can make it harder to separate concerns and reuse components.
Reactive forms provide better performance because the form data is handled entirely in code. Template-driven forms are slower because the form data is processed in the DOM.
Reactive forms provide a better user experience because they offer more flexibility and control over the form behavior. Template-driven forms can be less intuitive and less customizable for complex use cases.

34. What is the difference between NgZone and ChangeDetectorRef in AngularJS?

Both NgZone and ChangeDetectorRef are important tools in Angular for managing performance and detecting changes. While NgZone is focused on running tasks outside of Angular’s zone to avoid blocking the UI, ChangeDetectorRef is used to manually trigger change detection and update a component’s view.

Here’s a tabular comparison showing the main differences between NgZone and ChangeDetectorRef:

NgZone ChangeDetectorRef
Purpose Manages and executes tasks outside Angular’s zone Triggers change detection for a component
Use case Long-running tasks that could block the UI Updating component’s view after data changes
API Provides run() method to execute tasks outside the zone Provides detectChanges() method to trigger change detection
Trigger Does not trigger change detection automatically Requires manual triggering
Performance Can improve performance by reducing unnecessary change detection Can cause unnecessary change detection if used too frequently
Dependencies No dependencies on components Depends on a component instance
Example Running a heavy computation or making an HTTP request Updating a component’s view after data changes

35. What is the difference between @Input and @Output in AngularJS?

Both @Input and @Output are decorators in Angular that enable communication between components in a hierarchical manner. 

@Input is used to pass data from a parent component to a child component, while @Output is used to emit data from a child component to a parent component.

Let’s understand the differences between @Input and @Output:

@Input @Output
Purpose To pass data from parent component to child component To emit data from child component to parent component
Direction Data flows from parent to child component Data flows from child to parent component
Binding Uses property binding [inputProp]=”parentData” Uses event binding (outputEvent)=”childData.emit()”
Type Decorator for properties in child component Decorator for events in child component
Syntax @Input() inputProp: Type = defaultValue @Output() outputEvent: EventEmitter<Type> = new EventEmitter<Type>()
Example <child-component [inputProp]=”parentData”></child-component> <child-component (outputEvent)=”parentData = $event”></child-component>

Angular Interview Questions for 8 Years Experience

Now, let’s discuss some advanced Angular interview questions and answers which are highly relevant for professionals having around 8 years of experience in web development. 

36. Explain the AngularJS Ivy Renderer and its benefits.

It is a new rendering engine introduced in Angular 9 that replaces the previous View Engine. Its primary purpose is to make Angular applications smaller, faster, and more efficient.

Here are some of the benefits of the Ivy Renderer in Angular:

Improved Performance: 

It offers a number of performance improvements over the previous rendering engine. For instance, it offers faster and more efficient rendering of components, which means that applications load faster and respond more quickly to user interactions.

Smaller Bundle Size: 

It provides better tree-shaking capabilities, which helps reduce the size of the application bundle by removing unused code. This means that the application loads faster and consumes less memory.

Better Debugging: 

It brings better debugging capabilities by generating more readable error messages and stack traces. This helps developers quickly identify and fix errors in their code.

Improved Template Handling: 

Ivy also improves template handling capabilities, which means that templates can be parsed and compiled more efficiently. This results in the faster rendering of components and better application performance.

Improved Type Checking: 

Ivy Renderer offers improved type-checking capabilities, which helps developers catch errors at compile time rather than runtime. This helps improve the quality and reliability of the code.

Improved Testing: 

Furthermore, it brings better support for testing Angular applications. It provides a new testing API that allows developers to test components more easily and efficiently.

37. What is the difference between AngularJS 2 and AngularJS 1.x?

AngularJS 2 is a major upgrade from AngularJS 1.x, with significant differences in architecture, language, component structure, templating, change detection, and routing. 

Here are some of the key differences between the two versions:

AngularJS 1.x AngularJS 2+
Architecture Uses $scope for data binding and manipulation Uses RxJS Observables and Components for data flow
Language JavaScript TypeScript
Module System Uses RequireJS or Angular’s built-in system Uses ES6 modules
Component Structure Directives and Controllers Components and Directives
Templating Uses plain HTML with Angular directives Uses a more modern HTML and template syntax
Change Detection Uses dirty checking Uses Zone.js and a tree-shaking mechanism
Routing Uses $routeProvider Uses Angular Router
Performance Can become slow due to two-way data binding Faster rendering and change detection

It is among the top Angular interview questions for 8 years experience. Make sure to remember and know the right answer. 

38. How do you optimize the performance of an AngularJS application that handles large datasets?

Here are some tips to optimize the performance of an Angular app handling large datasets:

Use one-time binding: 

One-time binding is a technique that allows you to bind a value to a template expression only once. This can significantly improve performance when you have large datasets, as it reduces the number of watchers that Angular has to create and update.

Use pagination: 

Instead of loading all the data at once, consider using pagination to load data in chunks. This can help reduce the amount of data that needs to be loaded and displayed at once, which can improve the overall performance of the application.

Use filters: 

AngularJS provides powerful filtering capabilities that can be used to filter large datasets. By filtering the data on the server-side and then only displaying the filtered data in the UI, you can improve the performance of your application.

Use ng-repeat with track by: 

When using ng-repeat to iterate over a large dataset, use the track by syntax to track each item by a unique identifier. This will help AngularJS to efficiently update the DOM when the data changes.

Use the AngularJS built-in functions: 

AngularJS has built-in functions like limitTo, orderBy, and filter that can be used to handle large datasets efficiently.

Use lazy loading: 

Lazy loading is a technique that allows you to defer the loading of data until it is needed. This can help reduce the amount of data that needs to be loaded initially and can improve the overall performance of your application.

Avoid using ng-show and ng-hide: 

When using ng-show and ng-hide to show and hide elements based on conditions, AngularJS still creates the elements even if they are not displayed. This can impact the performance of your application when working with large datasets. Instead, consider using ng-if, which only creates the elements when they are needed.

39. How do you optimize the SEO of an AngularJS application that uses dynamic content?

Optimizing the SEO of an Angular application that uses dynamic content can be challenging, but there are several strategies that can help improve your search engine rankings. 

Here are some tips:

Use Server-side rendering (SSR):

This technique allows search engines to crawl and index your pages more easily because they can see the fully rendered HTML content. By using SSR, you can improve the visibility of your website on search engines and boost your SEO rankings.

Implement meta tags: 

Meta tags provide information about your website to search engines and social media platforms. Make sure to include relevant meta tags such as title tags, description tags, and Open Graph tags to improve your website’s visibility on search engines and social media platforms.

Use friendly URLs: 

Use friendly URLs that are easy to read and include relevant keywords. This will help search engines and users understand what your pages are about and improve your search engine rankings.

Use schema markup: 

Schema markup is a type of code that provides additional information about your website to search engines. Implementing schema markup can help improve your search engine rankings and make your website more visible in search engine results pages (SERPs).

Avoid duplicate content: 

If your AngularJS application uses dynamic content, make sure to avoid duplicate content by using canonical URLs or implementing a 301 redirect. This will ensure that search engines are not penalizing your website for having duplicate content.

It is yet another one of the frequently asked Angular interview questions for 8 years experience. One can learn search engine optimization skills with a reliable online SEO course.

40. What is the difference between AngularJS and AngularJS Universal?

Here is a tabular comparison showing the differences between Angular and Angular Universal:

AngularJS AngularJS Universal
Definition A front-end JavaScript framework for building web applications A server-side rendering solution for AngularJS
Language JavaScript JavaScript
Architecture Uses a Model-View-Controller (MVC) architecture Uses a Single Page Application (SPA) architecture
Platform Runs on the client-side in a web browser Runs on the server-side with Node.js
SEO Limited support for search engine optimization (SEO) due to its SPA architecture Provides better SEO support by rendering pages on the server-side before sending them to the client
Performance May experience slower initial load times due to its SPA architecture Can provide faster initial load times and better perceived performance due to server-side rendering
Compatibility Works with older browsers that do not support newer web standards May require a newer version of Node.js and may not work with older browsers
Configuration Requires separate server-side code to handle server-side rendering Includes built-in support for server-side rendering, but may require additional configuration for more complex applications

41. How to implement authentication and authorization in an AngularJS application using OAuth2?

Adding authentication and authorization in Angular using OAuth2 involves the following steps:

Register your application with the OAuth2 provider: 

Register your application with the OAuth2 provider to obtain a client ID and client secret. This will allow your application to authenticate with the OAuth2 provider.

Configure your AngularJS application: 

Configure your AngularJS application to redirect to the OAuth2 provider’s authorization endpoint when the user clicks the login button. This will initiate the OAuth2 authentication process.

Obtain an access token: 

Once the user has authenticated with the OAuth2 provider, your application will receive an authorization code. Your application should exchange this authorization code for an access token from the OAuth2 provider’s token endpoint.

Store the access token: 

Store the access token in a secure manner, such as in an HTTP-only cookie or in local storage.

Use the access token for API requests: 

When making API requests to your server, include the access token in the request headers. Your server can then use this token to authenticate the user and authorize their actions.

Refresh the access token: 

Access tokens have a limited lifespan, so your application should be able to refresh the token when it expires. This can be done by sending a refresh token to the OAuth2 provider’s token endpoint in exchange for a new access token.

42. How to implement state management in AngularJS using Redux?

Implementing state management in Angular using Redux involves the following steps:

Install the required packages: 

First, install the required packages for Redux and AngularJS integration, such as “redux” and “ng-redux”.

Create the Redux store: 

Create a Redux store to hold the application’s state using the “createStore” function from the “redux” package.

Define the initial state: 

Define the initial state for the application using a JavaScript object. This object should represent the entire state of the application.

Define the Redux reducers: 

Define the Redux reducers using the “combineReducers” function from the “redux” package. These reducers will update the application state based on dispatched actions.

Create the AngularJS store service: 

Create an AngularJS service to provide access to the Redux store. This service should use the “ng-redux” package to integrate with AngularJS.

Connect AngularJS components to the store: 

Connect AngularJS components to the Redux store using the “connect” function from the “ng-redux” package. This will allow components to access and update the application state.

Dispatch actions: 

Dispatch actions from AngularJS components to update the application state. Actions should be plain JavaScript objects with a “type” property and optional “payload” property.

43. What is the difference between RxJS and AngularJS observables?

While preparing for Angular interview questions and answers for experienced, you can’t skip the RxJS topic. Let’s know the answer to this question here.

Observables RxJS AngularJS
Type Third-party library Built-in part of AngularJS framework
Syntax Uses RxJS library and Observable class Uses $scope object and $watch function
Operators Provides a wide range of operators for creating, transforming, and combining observables Limited set of built-in directives for creating and transforming observables
Subscriptions Provides a variety of subscription methods for subscribing to observables Uses $watch function to subscribe to observables
Error Handling Provides a variety of error handling methods, such as catchError and retry, to handle errors in observables Uses try-catch blocks and error handling functions to handle errors in observables
Async Operations Provides a variety of methods for working with asynchronous data streams, such as debounceTime and switchMap Limited support for working with asynchronous data streams

44. How do you handle security issues in an AngularJS application?

There are several ways to handle security issues in an Angular app:

Authentication:

Implement user authentication to ensure that only authorized users can access your application. This can be done using third-party libraries like Auth0 or by building your own authentication system.

Authorization:

Implement role-based access control to restrict users from accessing certain parts of your application. This can be done using AngularJS’s built-in ng-if directive or by creating custom directives.

Input Validation: 

Validate all input received from users, including form submissions and API requests, to prevent malicious attacks such as SQL injection or cross-site scripting (XSS) attacks. AngularJS provides built-in form validation capabilities that can help with this.

HTTPS: 

Use HTTPS to encrypt all communication between the client and server to prevent man-in-the-middle attacks.

CORS

Implement Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) to restrict which domains can access your API endpoints. This can be done using the CORS middleware in your server-side code.

Secure Storage: 

Use secure storage mechanisms like cookies or local storage to store sensitive information like authentication tokens or session data.

Regular updates: 

Keep your AngularJS version updated to ensure that you are using the latest security patches and bug fixes.

45. How to implement real-time communication in an AngularJS application using WebSockets?

Here is how to add A/B testing in AngularJS:

Install the required packages: 

First, install the required packages for WebSockets and AngularJS integration, such as “socket.io-client” and “angular-socket-io”.

Create the WebSocket connection: 

Create a WebSocket connection to the server using the “socket.io-client” package. This will allow the client to send and receive real-time data from the server.

Define the AngularJS socket service: 

Define an Angular service to provide access to the WebSocket connection. This service should use the “angular-socket-io” package to integrate with AngularJS.

Implement event listeners: 

Implement event listeners on the client-side to receive data from the server. These listeners should be added to the AngularJS socket service and will be triggered when the server sends data.

Send data to the server: 

Send data to the server using the WebSocket connection. This can be done through the AngularJS socket service by calling its “emit” method and passing in the data to be sent.

Handle errors: 

Handle errors that may occur during the WebSocket connection by implementing error handling logic. This can be done using the “on” method on the AngularJS socket service to listen for error events.

Suggested Reading: HTML Interview Questions and Answers 

46. How to implement A/B testing in an AngularJS application?

Here is how to add A/B testing in AngularJS:

a) Define the A/B test: 

Define the specific feature or variation that will be tested in the AngularJS application. This could be a different layout, wording, or functionality.

b) Set up the testing framework: 

Set up a testing framework to run the A/B test. This can be done using a third-party A/B testing tool or by implementing custom testing logic in the AngularJS application.

c) Randomize user groups: 

Randomly assign users to different test groups, such as group A and group B. This can be done using a random number generator or a third-party testing tool.

d) Implement the test variations: 

Implement the variations of the feature being tested in the AngularJS application, such as a different layout or wording. These variations should be coded separately for each test group.

e) Track and measure results: 

Track and measure the results of the A/B test using analytics tools or custom tracking logic. This will allow you to determine which test variation performed better and to make data-driven decisions about the feature being tested.

f) Implement the winning variation:

Implement the winning variation of the feature being tested in the AngularJS application. This variation should be applied to all users of the application.

47. How to implement unit testing in AngularJS using Jest?

Implementing unit testing in an AngularJS application using Jest involves the following steps:

a) Install the required packages: 

First, install the required packages for Jest and AngularJS integration, such as “jest”, “jest-preset-angular”, and “@types/jest”.

b) Configure Jest: 

Configure Jest to work with AngularJS using the “jest-preset-angular” package. This package provides preconfigured settings for testing AngularJS components and services.

c) Write tests: 

Write tests for AngularJS components and services using Jest syntax. Tests should be organized into separate test files and should include assertions to check expected behavior.

d) Mock dependencies: 

Mock dependencies in test files using Jest’s mocking functionality. This allows you to isolate the component or service being tested and focus on its specific behavior.

e) Run tests: 

Run the Jest tests using the “npm test” command. This will execute all test files and provide feedback on any test failures.

f) Refactor code based on test results: 

Refactor code based on test results to improve the performance, reliability, and maintainability of the AngularJS application.

48. How to add pagination and infinite scrolling in an Angular application?

Adding animations in an AngularJS application involves the following steps:

a) Set up the data source: 

Set up a data source to provide the data that will be displayed in the AngularJS application. This can be done using a REST API or any other data source.

b) Implement pagination: 

Implement pagination by dividing the data into smaller chunks and displaying them in separate pages. This can be done using the “limitTo” filter in AngularJS, which limits the number of items displayed in a given range.

c) Implement navigation: 

Implement navigation controls to allow the user to navigate between different pages of data. This can be done using buttons, links, or any other user interface element.

d) Implement infinite scrolling: 

Implement infinite scrolling by dynamically loading more data as the user scrolls down the page. This can be done using the “ngInfiniteScroll” directive in AngularJS, which loads more data when the user reaches the bottom of the page.

e) Handle data updates: 

Handle data updates that may occur while the user is viewing the data. This can be done by refreshing the data source periodically or using websockets to receive real-time updates.

f) Optimize performance: 

Optimize performance by using efficient data structures, caching frequently accessed data, and minimizing network requests

49. How to implement animations in Angular?

Adding animations in an AngularJS application involves the following steps:

a) Install the required packages: 

First, install the required packages for AngularJS animations, such as “angular-animate” and “ngAnimate”.

b) Define the animation: 

Define the animation that will be applied to an element using AngularJS directives. Animations can be defined using CSS3 transitions and keyframe animations, or using JavaScript functions.

c) Trigger the animation: 

Trigger the animation using AngularJS directives such as “ng-show”, “ng-hide”, “ng-class”, or “ng-repeat”. These directives allow you to apply the animation to specific elements based on user interactions or other conditions.

d) Configure animation options: 

Configure animation options such as duration, delay, easing, and iteration count using AngularJS directives or JavaScript code. These options allow you to customize the behavior and appearance of the animation.

e) Test the animation: 

est the animation thoroughly to ensure that it works as expected and does not negatively impact performance or user experience.

f) Optimize performance: 

Optimize performance by using efficient animation techniques, minimizing network requests, and reducing the amount of data that needs to be animated.

 Angular Interview Questions for 10 Years Experience

Below are the commonly asked interview questions on AngularJS for 10 years of experience:

  1. How do you optimize the performance of an AngularJS application that handles large-scale data processing?
  2. Explain the AngularJS zone.js library and how it is used for performance optimization.
  3. What is the difference between the ngOnChanges, ngOnInit, and ngAfterViewInit lifecycle hooks in AngularJS?
  4. What is the difference between the AngularJS router and the AngularJS UI router?
  5. What are some of the advanced AngularJS features that you have used in your projects?
  6. How do you implement progressive web apps (PWA) in AngularJS 2+?
  7. How do you implement real-time communication in an AngularJS application using WebSockets and other technologies?
  8. How do you implement cross-platform applications using AngularJS?
  9. What is the difference between AngularJS and AngularJS Universal in terms of server-side rendering?
  10. How do you implement unit testing in an AngularJS application using Cypress?
  11. How do you implement continuous integration and continuous deployment (CI/CD) in an AngularJS application using Jenkins or other tools?

Angular Interview Questions for 15 Years Experience

Following are the top scenario-based AngularJS interview questions for experienced professionals.

  1. What are some of the most complex problems you have solved while working with AngularJS?
  2. Explain the AngularJS component lifecycle hooks and their significance.
  3. What is the difference between AngularJS and AngularJS Elements?
  4. What is the difference between AngularJS and other front-end frameworks like React, Vue.js, and Svelte?
  5. How do you implement serverless applications using AngularJS and AWS Lambda?
  6. How do you handle data synchronization and offline data storage in an AngularJS application?
  7. How do you implement authentication and authorization in an AngularJS application using OpenID Connect?
  8. How do you implement micro-frontends using AngularJS?
  9. What is the difference between AngularJS dependency injection and inversion of control (IoC)?
  10. How do you implement AngularJS application testing using Cypress, Jest, and other frameworks?
  11. How do you implement single sign-on (SSO) in an AngularJS application using SAML or other technologies?
  12. What are some of the advanced AngularJS design patterns and practices that you follow while developing an application?
  13. How do you implement code splitting and lazy loading in an AngularJS application using Webpack and other tools?
  14. How do you implement advanced data visualization and charting using AngularJS and D3.js?
  15. How do you implement performance tuning and optimization in an AngularJS application using browser profiling and debugging tools?
  16. How do you implement accessibility features in an AngularJS application to support users with disabilities?
  17. What is the role of observables in AngularJS and how do you use them to build reactive applications?

Scenario-Based Angular Interview Questions

Following are the top scenario-based AngularJS interview questions for experienced professionals.

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS component needs to communicate with another component that is not a direct parent or child?

  1. Suppose you have a complex form in your AngularJS application, how would you implement validation for this form and display meaningful error messages?

  1. How would you implement a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to handle real-time data updates from a backend API?

  1. Suppose you need to implement pagination and sorting for a large dataset in an AngularJS application, how would you approach this?

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to display different UI components based on the user’s role or permissions?

  1. Suppose you need to implement client-side caching for frequently accessed data in an AngularJS application, how would you implement this?

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to implement complex data filtering based on multiple criteria?

  1. Suppose you need to implement drag and drop functionality for an AngularJS application, how would you go about this?

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to implement a multi-step wizard or form with validation?

  1. Suppose you need to implement a custom directive in an AngularJS application, how would you approach this and what are some best practices to follow?

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to consume a third-party API that requires authentication using OAuth2?

  1. Suppose you need to implement a notification system for an AngularJS application, how would you approach this and what are some best practices to follow?

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to implement a dynamic menu system based on user roles or permissions?

  1. Suppose you need to implement routing and navigation for an AngularJS application with multiple modules and lazy loading, how would you approach this?

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to implement complex animations and transitions?

  1. Suppose you need to implement internationalization and localization for an AngularJS application, how would you approach this and what are some best practices to follow?

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to implement offline functionality using Service Workers?

  1. Suppose you need to implement a complex chart or graph for an AngularJS application, how would you approach this and what are some best practices to follow?

  1. How would you handle a scenario where an AngularJS application needs to implement file uploads and downloads?

  1. Suppose you need to implement unit testing for an AngularJS application, how would you approach this and what are some best practices to follow?

Frequently Asked Questions Related to AngularJS

1. What are Angular Interview Questions?

These are the commonly asked interview questions when you appear for a job interview as a web developer or someone skilled in AngularJS. 

These questions are suitable for you whether you are going to a startup, SMB, large enterprise or famous companies like TCS, Accenture, Infosys, Cognizant, Tech Mahindra, Wipro, Capgemini, Wissen Technology, L&T Infotech, Dell, Zoho, Verizon, Morgan Stanley, Oodles Technologies, HCL, just to name a few. 

In addition, these questions are also appropriate for UI Developer, Front-end Developer, Full-Stack Developer, .NET Developer, etc. 

2. What is AngularJS, and what are its career prospects?

It is a JavaScript-based open-source web application framework that helps developers to build dynamic, single-page web applications. 

The demand for Angular developers is high, and it has a bright future as it is used by many companies worldwide. A career in AngularJS offers lucrative job opportunities for professionals who are skilled in it.

3. What is the scope of AngularJS in the market?

AngularJS has a strong market presence as it is widely used for building dynamic and interactive web applications. It has been adopted by many companies, including Google, Netflix, IBM, and PayPal. 

With the growing demand for web development, the demand for AngularJS developers is also increasing. You can learn it as part of a full-stack development course

4. What is the salary of an AngularJS developer?

The salary of an AngularJS developer depends on various factors such as experience, location, company, and job responsibilities. 

The average AngularJS Developer salary in India is around INR 4.1 LPA.

5. What are the skills required to become an AngularJS developer?

To become an AngularJS developer, you should have a strong understanding of web development technologies such as HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. 

You should also have experience in AngularJS, along with knowledge of TypeScript, Node.js, and other related frameworks. Good communication and problem-solving skills are also important.

6. What are the job roles available for AngularJS developers?

The job roles available for AngularJS developers include: 

– AngularJS Developer 
– Front-end Developer 
– Full-stack Developer 
– UI Developer
– Web Application Developer.

7. What are the top companies hiring AngularJS developers

The top companies hiring AngularJS developers include: 

– Google 
– Microsoft 
– IBM
– Amazon 
– PayPal 
– Netflix, 
and many more.

8. Is it necessary to have a degree in computer science to become an AngularJS developer?

No, it is not necessary to have a degree in computer science to become an AngularJS developer. However, having a degree in computer science or related fields can give you an advantage when applying for jobs. What is more important is your practical knowledge and experience in web development.

Wrapping Up:

Angular is a powerful and widely used framework for building modern web applications. As with any technology, it’s important for developers to be prepared for the interview process by familiarizing themselves with common Angular interview questions and answers and having a strong understanding of the framework’s key concepts and features.

The post 50+ Angular Interview Questions and Answers (2025) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
50+ Top DBMS Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/dbms-interview-questions/ Tue, 30 Jul 2024 12:58:11 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=2631 Welcome, aspiring data wizards! Are you ready to take on the challenge of a job interview at your dream company? Do you have what it takes to impress your interviewer with your database management skills? Or are you simply looking for some tips and tricks to brush up on your DBMS knowledge? Well, fear not! ...

The post 50+ Top DBMS Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

Welcome, aspiring data wizards!

Are you ready to take on the challenge of a job interview at your dream company? Do you have what it takes to impress your interviewer with your database management skills? Or are you simply looking for some tips and tricks to brush up on your DBMS knowledge?

Well, fear not! 

Because you have stumbled upon the holy grail of most asked DBMS interview questions and answers. We’ve got everything you need to help you crack that interview, whether you’re a beginner or an experienced pro. 

And if you’re applying to companies like Wipro, TCS, HCL, Infosys, Capgemini, Cognizant, or any other tech giant, we’ve got you covered with company-specific DBMS interview questions too.

Upskill Yourself With Live Training

Full Stack Web Development Course WordPress Course
Front-End Development Course MERN Stack Course

The Growing Demand for DBMS

Data is the lifeblood of modern businesses, and database management systems (DBMS) are the beating heart that keeps it all flowing smoothly. 

The demand for DBMS has been growing steadily over the years, as businesses continue to generate and store massive amounts of data. DBMS is essential in managing this data and providing access to it when needed. 

In fact, the global DBMS market size reached $65.3 billion in 2022. From 2023 to 2028, this market is expected to witness a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 10.8%.

With this increasing demand for DBMS, there is also a growing need for skilled professionals. 

DBMS skills are highly valued in many industries, including information technology, finance, healthcare, and retail.

In terms of specific DBMS technologies, some of the most in-demand skills include:

  • SQL
  • Oracle
  • MySQL
  • MongoDB
  • PostgreSQL

Knowledge of cloud-based DBMS like Amazon Web Services (AWS) and Microsoft Azure is also becoming increasingly important as more businesses move to the cloud.

So, if you’re looking to advance your career in the tech industry, having a strong understanding of DBMS and related technologies is a great way to stand out and increase your earning potential.

That’s why we’ve put together this blog post on top DBMS interview questions and answers that cover everything you need to know. We’ll walk you through the basics and then dive into more advanced topics. So whether you’re a seasoned pro or just starting out, get ready to take your database management skills to the next level!

Basic DBMS Interview Questions for Freshers

If you are a beginner preparing for a job interview in this field, then you must be wondering about the kind of questions that may come up during the interview. 

Here, we will be discussing the top basic DBMS interview questions and answers for freshers that are commonly asked during the recruitment process. 

1. What is DBMS? Explain in simple terms.

DBMS stands for Database Management System. 

It is a software system that allows users to manage, organize, and manipulate data in a database. If you are not aware of what a database is, then understand that it is a collection of data that is stored electronically, and a DBMS provides a way to interact with this data in a structured and organized way.

Let’s Understand DBMS Definition With Real-life Example

Imagine you run a small retail store that sells various products, such as clothing, accessories, and home goods. You want to keep track of your inventory, customer information, sales data, and employee records.

Instead of using a bunch of different spreadsheets or paper records to manage all of this information, you could use a database management system to store and organize everything in one place. 

With a DBMS, you could create a database that includes tables for each type of information you need to track. This can include a table for inventory, a table for customer information, a table for sales data, a table for employee records, and so on.

You can easily add new data to each table, update existing data, or delete data as needed. You could also run queries to search for specific information or generate reports to analyze data trends. 

Overall, a DBMS would make it much easier for you to manage and use all of the data you need to run your retail store effectively.

2. Where can DBMS be used?

DBMS (Database Management System) can be used in a variety of applications and industries where data storage, organization, retrieval, and manipulation are required. 

Here are some common examples of where DBMS can be used:

a) Business: 

It is widely used by businesses to store and manage customer data, sales data, inventory data, financial data, employee data, and much more.

b) Healthcare: 

DBMS is used to manage patient data, including medical history, prescriptions, test results, and other information.

c) Education: 

Schools, colleges, and other educational organizations can implement DBMS to store student information, such as attendance records, grades, and academic performance.

d) Government: 

Governments use DBMS to store and manage data related to taxes, licenses, permits, and other official records.

e) E-commerce: 

Online retailers use DBMS to store and manage product catalogs, customer orders, and payment information.

f) Social Media Platforms: 

Social media platforms use DBMS to store and manage user data, including profiles, posts, comments, and messages.

g) Telecommunication Industry: 

Telecommunications companies use DBMS to store and manage customer account information, call records, and network usage data.

3. When was DBMS first introduced?

The first DBMS was introduced in the early 1960s, with IBM’s Integrated Data Store (IDS) being one of the earliest examples.

However, the relational database model, which forms the basis of most modern DBMSs, was first introduced in the 1970s by Edgar F. Codd, a researcher at IBM. 

Codd’s paper “A Relational Model of Data for Large Shared Data Banks” described a new approach to data management that emphasized the use of tables and relationships between them, rather than hierarchical or network-based data models.

The first commercial relational DBMS was released by IBM in 1981, called SQL/DS. This was followed by other popular relational DBMSs, including Oracle, Microsoft SQL Server, and MySQL.

4. What are the benefits of DBMS?

There are several advantages of using DBMS (Database Management System) in an organization or application. 

Some of the most significant benefits include:

Efficient data management: 

DBMS allows for efficient data management by organizing data in a structured way, making it easy to search, retrieve, and manipulate data.

Data consistency and integrity: 

Database management system ensures data consistency and integrity by enforcing data constraints and rules, such as uniqueness and referential integrity, to prevent errors and inconsistencies in the data.

Improved data security: 

It provides better data security by allowing access to data only to authorized users and by implementing various security mechanisms like encryption, access control, and auditing.

Improved data accessibility: 

It provides easy access to data by allowing multiple users to access and manipulate data simultaneously. This can be achieved without compromising the data’s integrity or consistency.

Increased productivity: 

Database management system improves productivity by providing faster access to data, minimizing manual data entry and reducing the likelihood of errors.

Better decision-making: 

Moreover, it facilitates better decision-making by providing access to accurate, up-to-date, and comprehensive data. This helps in making informed decisions based on data analysis.

Scalability: 

DBMS can handle large amounts of data and can scale up or down depending on an organization’s needs, making it easy to manage growing amounts of data.

5. What is the difference between a database and DBMS?

A database and a DBMS (Database Management System) are two related but distinct concepts in the field of data management. 

It is one of the top DBMS interview questions for placement, especially if you are a fresher.

Here are the differences between both, presented in tabular form:

Database DBMS
A collection of related data A software system that manages the storage, organization, and retrieval of data
Can be a simple text file or a complex system of interconnected tables A software system with many features and capabilities
Can be managed manually or with the help of a DBMS Requires a DBMS to function effectively
Can be small or large Can handle small to very large databases
Primarily focuses on storing and retrieving data Provides a wide range of features, including data security, backup and recovery, concurrency control, and more
Data can be accessed and modified directly Data access and modification are controlled by the DBMS, using SQL (Structured Query Language) or other programming languages
Performance and scalability are limited by the hardware and software used to manage the database Performance and scalability can be optimized using various techniques and features provided by the DBMS

Suggested Reading: Top 60 NodeJS Interview Questions and Answers for Freshers & Experienced Professionals

6. What are the 3 main types of databases?

There are several types of databases, but the three main types of databases are:

i) Relational databases

Relational databases are the most common type of databases. They store data in tables, where each table represents a specific entity or object, and each row represents a record or instance of that entity. 

Relational databases use SQL (Structured Query Language) to manage and manipulate data.

ii) NoSQL databases

NoSQL databases are non-relational databases that store data in a variety of ways, such as key-value pairs, documents, or graphs. 

They are designed to handle large volumes of unstructured or semi-structured data and can scale horizontally to handle increasing amounts of data.

iii) Object-oriented databases

Object-oriented databases store data as objects, which are instances of classes that contain both data and behavior. 

Object-oriented databases are well-suited for complex data structures and applications that require extensive data manipulation.

Each type of database has its own strengths and weaknesses and is suitable for different types of applications. Choosing the right type of database depends on factors such as the size and complexity of the data, the performance requirements of the application, and the scalability needs of the system.

7. What are the 3 main functions of a DBMS?

The three main functions of a DBMS (Database Management System) are:

i) Data storage

The primary function of a DBMS is to store large amounts of data in an organized and structured way. 

A DBMS provides mechanisms to define the structure of data, including tables, fields, and relationships between tables. It also manages the physical storage of data on disk or other storage devices.

ii) Data retrieval and manipulation

A DBMS allows users to retrieve, update, and delete data from the database using various methods such as SQL (Structured Query Language) queries. 

It provides mechanisms to search, sort, filter, and group data in different ways, making it easier for users to find the information they need.

iii) Data security and integrity

A DBMS provides mechanisms to ensure the security and integrity of data in the database. It allows users to control access to data based on roles and permissions, ensuring that only authorized users can access sensitive data. 

It also provides mechanisms to prevent data corruption, such as transaction processing and data validation rules.

These functions are essential for managing large amounts of data efficiently and securely. A DBMS provides a centralized and controlled environment for storing and managing data, ensuring that it is available when needed and is accurate and consistent.

8. What is difference between DBMS and RDBMS? Explain with example.

DBMS (Database Management System) and RDBMS (Relational Database Management System) are two different types of database management systems. Here are the differences between the both:

DBMS RDBMS
Manages data as files Manages data as tables or relations
Stores data in a hierarchical or navigational manner Stores data in a tabular or two-dimensional form
Does not enforce data integrity or consistency Enforces data integrity and consistency using various constraints, such as primary keys, foreign keys, and other rules
Does not support complex queries and transactions Supports complex queries and transactions using SQL or other query languages
Does not provide support for relationships between tables Provides support for relationships between tables, enabling the creation of complex data models
Examples: IMS, CODASYL Examples: Oracle, MySQL, SQL Server

So, you can say that DBMS manages data as files and stores data in a hierarchical or navigational manner. It does not enforce data integrity or consistency and does not support complex queries and transactions. 

On the other hand, RDBMS manages data as tables or relations and stores data in a tabular or two-dimensional form. 

It enforces data integrity and consistency using various constraints, and supports complex queries and transactions using SQL or other query languages. RDBMS also provides support for relationships between tables, enabling the creation of complex data models.

For example, Oracle is an RDBMS that allows you to store data in tables, enforce data constraints, and perform complex queries using SQL. IMS, on the other hand, is a DBMS that stores data in hierarchical structures and does not enforce data constraints or provide support for complex queries.

You must be well-prepared for this type of DBMS interview questions and answers to land your dream job.

9. What is the purpose of database management system?

Some of the key purposes of using a DBMS include:

Data organization and management: 

It organizes data in a structured way, making it easy to search, retrieve, and manipulate data. It allows users to define the structure of the data and establish relationships between data elements.

Data integrity and consistency: 

A database management system enforces data integrity and consistency by providing mechanisms for data validation, error checking, and data constraints. This ensures that data is accurate, complete, and reliable.

Data security: 

Moreover, it provides better data security by allowing access to data only to authorized users and by implementing various security mechanisms like encryption, access control, and auditing.

Data sharing and concurrency: 

Using a database management system, more than one user can access and manipulate data simultaneously, without compromising the data’s integrity or consistency. It manages concurrency control, ensuring that multiple users can access data without causing conflicts or inconsistencies.

Data backup and recovery: 

It offers mechanisms for data backup and recovery, ensuring that data can be restored in case of accidental deletion or system failure.

Performance optimization: 

There are also some mechanisms for optimizing the performance of data retrieval and manipulation operations, such as indexing, query optimization, and caching.

Suggested Reading: Java vs JavaScript: All Differences Explained With Comparison

10. Which are the top DBMS languages?

The top Database Management System languages include:

SQL (Structured Query Language): 

SQL is the most commonly used language for managing relational databases. It allows users to create, modify, and retrieve data from a database.

PL/SQL (Procedural Language/Structured Query Language): 

It is Oracle’s proprietary language for managing and manipulating data in Oracle databases. It is an extension of SQL that allows users to write procedural code to manipulate data.

T-SQL (Transact-SQL): 

T-SQL is Microsoft’s proprietary language for managing and manipulating data in SQL Server databases. It is an extension of SQL that allows users to write procedural code to manipulate data.

NoSQL (Not only SQL): 

NoSQL is a term used to describe databases that do not use SQL as their primary language. 

Instead, they use other languages, such as JavaScript or Python. Some popular NoSQL databases include MongoDB and Cassandra.

PL/pgSQL: 

PL/pgSQL is a procedural language used in PostgreSQL. It allows users to write stored procedures, functions, and triggers to manipulate data.

11. What are attributes in DBMS?

An attribute refers to a characteristic or property of an entity, object, or relationship that is stored in a database. It is a named column of a table that stores a specific type of data, such as a string, number, or date.

Attributes in DBMS are used to define the structure of a database and to represent the characteristics of the data that is stored in the database. Each attribute has a name and a data type, which specifies the kind of data that can be stored in the attribute. 

For example, an attribute called “customer_name” might have a data type of “string,” indicating that it can store a sequence of characters.

12. What is the difference between DBMS and SQL?

DBMS and SQL are two different concepts, but they are often used together to manage and modify databases. 

Here is a comparison showing the differences between SQL and DBMS:

DBMS SQL
A software system used to manage and organize databases A programming language used to interact with a DBMS and manipulate data
Provides mechanisms for creating, storing, modifying, and retrieving data Provides a standard syntax for querying and manipulating data in a database
Can be used to manage different types of databases, such as relational, hierarchical, and network databases Primarily used for managing relational databases
Provides an interface for users to access and interact with data stored in a database Used to create and modify database structures, such as tables, indexes, and views
Provides security mechanisms to control access to data and ensure data integrity Used to retrieve data using queries, such as SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE
Examples include Oracle, Microsoft SQL Server, MySQL, and PostgreSQL Examples include Oracle SQL, Microsoft SQL Server T-SQL, MySQL SQL, and PostgreSQL SQL

Example of how DBMS and SQL work together for database management:

Let’s say you have a database that stores customer information, and you want to retrieve a list of customers who live in a particular city. To do this, you would use SQL to write a query that retrieves the relevant data from the database. 

The query might look something like this:

SELECT customer_name, customer_address FROM customers WHERE customer_city = ‘New York’;

This query would retrieve the customer names and addresses of all customers who live in New York. The DBMS would then execute the query and retrieve the relevant data from the database, returning the results to the user.

This type of topics are asked among the top DBMS interview questions for freshers.

13. What are the 5 basic SQL commands?

SQL (Structured Query Language) is a standard language used to manage relational databases. There are many SQL commands available, but the five basic SQL commands are:

SELECT

Using it, the retrieval of data can be done among tables. It allows you to specify which columns to retrieve and any filters or conditions to apply.

INSERT

It is used for adding new data to a table in a database. It requires specifying the name of the table and the values to insert for each column.

UPDATE

It is used for modification to existing data in a table in a database. It requires specifying the name of the table, the columns to update, and the new values.

DELETE

The DELETE command is used to remove data from a table in a database. It requires specifying the name of the table and any conditions to apply.

CREATE

The CREATE command is used to create new tables, views, indexes, and other database objects. It requires specifying the name of the object and the columns or other properties to define.

These five basic SQL commands are the foundation of many more complex SQL statements and are essential for managing data in a relational database.

14. What is normalization in DBMS?

It is the process of organizing data in a database, so that we can decrease redundancy and make the data integrity better. It is a set of rules that govern how a database should be designed and organized to ensure that the data is stored efficiently and accurately.

The normalization process involves breaking down a database into smaller, more manageable tables, and defining relationships between them. The goal is to eliminate redundant data and ensure that each piece of information is stored in only one place in the database.

There are several levels of normalization, known as normal forms, that a database can be designed to meet. The most commonly used normal forms are the first normal form (1NF), second normal form (2NF), and third normal form (3NF).

Here is a brief overview of each normal form:

  • First normal form (1NF): A table is in 1NF if it contains only atomic values (i.e., each attribute contains only a single value).

  • Second normal form (2NF): A table is in 2NF if it is in 1NF and each non-key attribute is dependent on the entire primary key (i.e., there are no partial dependencies).

  • Third normal form (3NF): A table is in 3NF if it is in 2NF and there are no transitive dependencies (i.e., each non-key attribute is dependent only on the primary key).

It is important for you to note that normalization is an important topic in the list of DBMS interview questions and answers.

15. What are the main DBMS components?

A database management system (DBMS) consists of several components that work together to manage and manipulate data in a database. 

Here are the main components of a DBMS:

Hardware: 

The physical devices that store and process the data, such as servers, storage devices, and network equipment.

Software: 

The software programs that enable users to create, modify, and query databases, such as the DBMS software itself, database drivers, and programming languages.

Data: 

The actual information stored in the database, such as customer records, product catalogs, or financial transactions.

Procedures: 

The rules and processes that govern how the data is managed and accessed, such as backup and recovery procedures, security policies, and data access controls.

Database schema: 

The blueprint or design of the database that defines the structure of the data, including tables, relationships between tables, and constraints on the data.

Database engine: 

The core component of the DBMS that manages the storage, retrieval, and manipulation of data, including functions such as indexing, data caching, and transaction processing.

Users: 

The people or applications that interact with the database, such as database administrators, developers, and end-users.

16. What are the disadvantages of DBMS?

While DBMS offers many benefits, there are also some disadvantages to consider. 

Complexity: 

DBMS can be complex and difficult to learn, particularly for those who are not familiar with database concepts and programming. This can require additional training and expertise, as well as potentially higher costs for hiring and retaining skilled personnel.

Cost: 

DBMS can be expensive, especially for large-scale systems that require high-performance hardware and software, as well as ongoing maintenance and support.

Security: 

While DBMS can provide security features such as encryption, access controls, and backup and recovery procedures, they are still vulnerable to data breaches and other security threats. This can be particularly concerning for sensitive or confidential data.

Single point of failure: 

DBMS relies on a single point of failure, meaning that if the system fails or experiences a breach, the entire database can be compromised or lost.

Performance: 

DBMS can be slower than traditional file-based systems, particularly for complex queries or large volumes of data. This can impact the overall performance of applications that rely on the database.

Maintenance: 

It requires ongoing maintenance and support, including regular backups, updates, and patches, which can be time-consuming and costly.

17. What is the difference between DBMS and file system?

DBMS and file systems are two different approaches to managing data. 

Here are the main differences between the two, presented in tabular comparison form:

Feature DBMS File System
Data Storage Organized into tables with inter-related data Unorganized data stored in files and folders
Data Access Structured query language (SQL) used to access and retrieve data File paths used to access data
Data Integrity Ensures data consistency through referential integrity, normalization, and other rules No built-in data consistency checks or rules
Scalability Supports large, complex datasets and multiple users simultaneously Limited in scalability and performance for large-scale datasets
Security Provides granular access controls, authentication, and authorization mechanisms Relies on operating system permissions and access controls
Maintenance Requires ongoing maintenance and support, including backups, updates, and patches Maintenance and support required, but typically less complex than DBMS
Applications Typically used for business applications, e-commerce, and data-driven applications Often used for document management, file sharing, and personal file storage

Suggested Reading: Top 14 JavaScript Frameworks and Libraries for Web Development

18. What are ACID properties of DBMS?

ACID stands for Atomicity, Consistency, Isolation, and Durability. These properties are the fundamental characteristics that ensure the reliability and consistency of data in a transactional DBMS (Database Management System).

Atomicity: 

Its role is to make sure that a transaction is counted as a single, indivisible unit of work. This means that either all the operations in the transaction will successfully complete or none of them will. In case some part of the transaction fails, the complete transaction is rolled back to its original state.

Consistency: 

Consistency ensures that the data in a database remains consistent before and after a transaction. This means that any change made to the database must not violate any integrity constraints, such as referential integrity or unique key constraints.

Isolation: 

Isolation ensures that transactions are executed independently of each other. This means that multiple transactions can be executed concurrently without interfering with each other. Each transaction should have its own space in memory, and the intermediate states of a transaction should not be visible to other transactions.

Durability: 

Durability ensures that once a transaction is committed, its effects are permanent and survive any subsequent failures, such as power outages or system crashes. 

This means that the changes made by a committed transaction are stored permanently in the database and cannot be lost due to any failure.

Together, these four properties of ACID ensure that transactions in a DBMS are reliable, consistent, and durable. These properties are critical for applications that require accurate and reliable data storage, such as financial transactions or airline reservations systems.

19. What is a tuple in DBMS?

A tuple refers to a single row or record in a database table that contains a set of related attributes or fields. A tuple represents a complete set of data for a specific entity or object that is being tracked by the database.

This is one of the most important interview questions on DBMS for freshers.

20. What is checkpoint in DBMS?

A checkpoint is a mechanism that ensures the consistency and durability of data in a database. It is a point in time when all the data in memory is written to disk, flushing all the modified data from cache to disk, and updates the transaction log, which tracks all the changes made to the database.

When a checkpoint occurs, the DBMS writes all the modified data from the buffer cache to the physical storage on disk, and updates the database’s metadata to reflect the changes. 

This process ensures that any data modifications made by transactions are written to the physical storage, making them durable even in the event of a system crash or power failure.

Checkpoints can occur periodically or manually triggered by the DBA (Database Administrator). Periodic checkpoints are scheduled to occur at a regular interval, such as every hour or every day, to reduce the number of changes lost in case of a system failure. 

Manual checkpoints are initiated by the DBA to ensure the durability of data in the database at any given time.

21. Explain what is a Relation in DBMS. How is it different from Relation Schema?

Relation

A relation is a table with rows and columns that stores related data in a structured format. Each row represents a record, and each column represents a field or attribute of that record. The relation is also referred to as a “table” in some database systems.

Relation Schema

On the other hand, a relation schema is a blueprint or a description of a relation’s structure. It specifies the names of the columns, the data types of the columns, and any constraints that must be followed when data is inserted into the relation.

In other words, the relation schema defines the structure of the relation, while the relation itself is the actual instance of the relation schema with data populated in it.

To better understand the difference between relation and relation schema, consider an analogy. Think of a relation as a physical table, while the relation schema is the blueprint or design that specifies the table’s size, shape, and properties. 

The table is the actual instance of the design that is used to store objects, while the design specifies how the table should be built and used.

22. What is DDL and DML?

DDL and DML are two important types of SQL statements used in database management.

DDL (Data Definition Language)

DDL stands for Data Definition Language, which is used to define the structure of a database schema. 

DDL commands are used to create, modify, and delete database objects such as tables, indexes, views, and stored procedures. Some common DDL commands include: 

  • CREATE
  • ALTER
  • DROP
  • TRUNCATE

DML (Data Manipulation Language)

DML stands for Data Manipulation Language, which is used to manipulate the data stored within a database. 

DML commands are used to add, modify, retrieve, and delete data from a database. Some common DML commands include: 

  • SELECT
  • INSERT
  • UPDATE
  • DELETE

23. What does query optimization mean in DBMS?

Query optimization is the process of improving the performance of database queries by selecting the most efficient query execution plan.

When a query is executed in a database, the DBMS must determine the most efficient way to execute the query, which involves selecting the appropriate indexes, algorithms, and access methods to use to retrieve the requested data. 

Query optimization process selects the best execution plan for a query, based on factors such as the size of the data set, available system resources, and the complexity of the query.

24. Why is query optimization important?

Query optimization is important because it can significantly improve the performance of database queries, which can be crucial in large-scale applications with high volumes of data. 

A well-optimized query can reduce the time and resources required to retrieve data, resulting in faster query response times, improved system performance, and a better user experience.

To optimize queries, DBMS systems use a variety of techniques such as index selection, join ordering, and cost-based optimization. The specific approach used by a DBMS depends on its architecture, the type of data being stored, and the query patterns of the application.

25. Explain the concept of denormalization in DBMS.

Denormalization is a technique used in database design to improve the performance of database queries by adding redundant data to one or more tables. 

It involves intentionally violating the normalization rules of a database schema to reduce the number of tables and simplify the database structure, with the aim of improving query performance.

Example

Consider a normalized database schema for an online bookstore, where customers, orders, and books are stored in separate tables. 

When a customer places an order, the order information is stored in the orders table and linked to the customer and book records using foreign keys. To retrieve all the information about a customer’s order, multiple table joins are required.

However, by denormalizing the database and adding customer and book information to the orders table, queries can be simplified, and the number of table joins required can be reduced, resulting in faster query response times.

Advanced DBMS Interview Questions and Answers

Are you an experienced DBMS professional looking to level up your career? Do you want to dazzle your interviewers with your knowledge of advanced DBMS concepts and impress them with your witty banter? 

Well, we’ll be exploring some of the most challenging and advanced DBMS interview questions and answers for experienced. 

1. What is data dependency in DBMS?

Data dependency in DBMS refers to the relationship between different attributes or data elements within a database. It describes how changes to one data element can impact other related data elements.

Types of Data Dependencies

There are two main types of data dependencies:

Functional dependency: 

This occurs when one attribute or set of attributes in a table determines the value of another attribute. 

For example, in a table of customer orders, the customer ID attribute may determine the customer name attribute.

Transitive dependency: 

This occurs when a functional dependency exists between three or more attributes, where one attribute determines another attribute which, in turn, determines a third attribute. 

For example, in a table of employee data, the employee ID attribute may determine the department attribute, which in turn determines the manager attribute.

2. What are database constraints?

Database constraints in DBMS are rules that are used to limit the type of data that can be inserted, updated, or deleted in a database. Constraints are used to ensure data integrity, consistency, and accuracy within a database.

Types of Database Constraints

There are several types of database constraints in DBMS:

Primary key constraint: 

This ensures that each record in a table has a unique identifier. The primary key constraint can be used to prevent duplicate data from being inserted into a table.

Foreign key constraint: 

This establishes a relationship between two tables based on a common attribute or key. The foreign key constraint ensures that the data in the dependent table is consistent with the data in the parent table.

Unique constraint: 

This ensures that a specific column or set of columns in a table contains unique values. The unique constraint can be used to prevent duplicate data from being inserted into a table.

Not null constraint: 

This ensures that a specific column in a table cannot contain null values. The not null constraint can be used to enforce data completeness and accuracy.

Check constraint: 

This ensures that the data in a column meets a specific condition or set of conditions. The check constraint can be used to enforce data accuracy and consistency.

3. What is data mining, and how is it used to extract useful information from a database?

Data mining is the process of discovering patterns, trends, and insights in large datasets using statistical and machine learning techniques. It involves extracting useful information from a database to help businesses make informed decisions, identify market trends, and improve operational efficiency.

Data mining techniques can be applied to a wide range of industries, including finance, healthcare, retail, and e-commerce. 

Example

A retailer may use data mining techniques to analyze customer purchase data to identify products that are frequently purchased together. This information can be used to optimize product placement and promotions, leading to increased sales and customer satisfaction.

4. What are the different steps and techniques involved in data mining?

The process of data mining involves several steps, including: 

  • data preprocessing
  • data cleaning
  • data transformation
  • data mining
  • interpretation/evaluation of results

During data mining, various statistical and machine learning algorithms are applied to the data to discover patterns and trends. The output of data mining can be presented in various forms, such as graphs, charts, and reports.

Some common techniques used in data mining include: 

  • association rule mining
  • classification
  • clustering
  • regression analysis
  • anomaly detection

Each technique is used to address a specific problem and extract insights from the data.

5. What is data warehousing, and how is it different from a traditional database system?

A data warehouse is a large, centralized repository of data that is used to support decision-making activities within an organization. It is designed to facilitate the analysis and reporting of data from various sources, making it easier for decision-makers to access and analyze information in a single location. 

data warehousing

In contrast to a traditional database system, a data warehouse is designed to support complex queries and analysis rather than transactional processing.

The primary difference between a data warehouse and a traditional database system is that a data warehouse is optimized for reporting and analysis, whereas a traditional database system is optimized for transactional processing. 

A traditional database system is designed to efficiently store, retrieve, and modify data in real-time as part of transactional processing. In contrast, a data warehouse is designed to store and manage large volumes of historical data that can be used for analysis and reporting.

6. Why do we need normalization in DBMS?

The purpose of normalization is to minimize data redundancy and improve database efficiency, consistency, and accuracy.

Reducing data redundancy: 

Normalization helps reduce data redundancy by breaking down large tables into smaller tables with related data. 

This can help eliminate duplicate data and ensure that each data element is stored only once, reducing the size of the database and improving performance.

Improving data integrity: 

Normalization can improve data integrity by ensuring that each data element is stored in only one location in the database. This can help prevent data inconsistencies and ensure that data is accurate and consistent.

Simplifying database design: 

Normalization can simplify database design by breaking down larger tables into smaller, more manageable tables. This can make it easier to maintain and update the database over time.

Enforcing referential integrity: 

Normalization can help enforce referential integrity by creating relationships between tables based on common attributes or keys. This can ensure that the data in the dependent table is consistent with the data in the parent table.

7. What is the functional dependency in DBMS?

The functional dependency is a relationship between two or more attributes in a relation or table. It is a constraint that determines the relationship between attributes in a table or relation based on the values of those attributes.

A functional dependency is defined as follows: given a relation or table R, a functional dependency exists between attributes X and Y, denoted as X → Y, if and only if each value of X in R is associated with exactly one value of Y in R.

In other words, a functional dependency X → Y means that for every value of X in a table, there is a unique corresponding value of Y in that table.

For example, consider a table called “Employees” with the following attributes: EmployeeID, Name, Address, and Phone. The functional dependencies in this table might be:

EmployeeID → Name, Address, Phone

Name → Address, Phone

This means that each employee’s ID uniquely determines their name, address, and phone number, and each employee’s name uniquely determines their address and phone number.

8. Why is concurrency control needed in DBMS?

Concurrency control is needed in DBMS to ensure that multiple transactions can access and modify the same data simultaneously without creating inconsistencies or conflicts. 

In other words, it is needed to manage concurrent access to the database and to prevent unwanted interactions between transactions.

When multiple transactions are executed concurrently, there is a risk of data inconsistencies or conflicts, such as lost updates, dirty reads, or inconsistent retrievals. Concurrency control techniques are used to prevent or manage these issues, and to ensure that each transaction has a consistent view of the database at all times.

Concurrency Control Techniques

Concurrency control techniques include 

  • Locking: involves placing locks on database objects to prevent other transactions from accessing them at the same time.
  • Timestamping: involves assigning timestamps to transactions and database objects to determine which transactions should be executed first.
  • Optimistic concurrency control: assumes that conflicts are rare, and allows transactions to proceed independently until they try to update the same data. At this point, one transaction is aborted and restarted to ensure consistency.

This is one of the advanced DBMS interview questions for which you must be well-prepared.

9. What is primary key in DBMS?

A primary key is a column or set of columns in a table that uniquely identifies each row in the table. It is a constraint that ensures the uniqueness and integrity of the data stored in the table.

The primary key serves as a reference point for other tables that may have a foreign key relationship with the table containing the primary key. The values in the primary key column(s) must be unique and cannot be null.

10. What are DBMS data models?

In DBMS, a data model is a conceptual representation of how data is organized and structured within a database. It provides a framework for describing and representing the data and the relationships between different data elements.

Types of Data Models

There are three main types of data models used in DBMS:

Hierarchical model: 

In this model, data is organized in a tree-like structure, with each parent node having one or more child nodes. It is a rigid and inflexible model that is best suited for storing data with a strict, predictable structure.

Network model: 

This model is an extension of the hierarchical model, where each node can have multiple parent and child nodes. It is more flexible than the hierarchical model, but can still be difficult to work with for complex data structures.

Relational model: 

This is the most commonly used data model in modern DBMS. In this, data is organized in tables, with each table representing a logical entity and each row representing a record. Relationships between different tables are established through keys and constraints.

There are also other data models used in DBMS, such as object-oriented, document-oriented, and graph-based models, which are used in specialized applications.

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

DBMS Interview Questions Power BI Interview Questions
Java Interview Questions JavaScript Interview Questions
CSS Interview Questions Flutter Interview Questions
HTML Interview Questions NodeJS Interview Questions
MySQL Interview Questions ReactJS Interview Questions
Python Interview Questions C Programming Interview Questions
OOPS Interview Questions Data Structure Interview Questions

11. What do you understand by relational algebra in DBMS?

Relational algebra is a theoretical framework and set of operations used to manipulate and query relational databases in DBMS. It is a formal language for expressing database operations and queries in a concise and precise way.

Relational algebra includes a set of basic operations, such as selection, projection, union, intersection, and difference, as well as more complex operations, like join, division, and aggregation. These operations can be combined to form more complex queries and expressions.

The basic operations in relational algebra can be expressed in terms of set operations, such as intersection, union, and difference, or in terms of predicates or logical conditions, such as equality or inequality. 

For example, the selection operation selects rows from a table that satisfy a given predicate or condition, while the projection operation selects a subset of columns from a table.

12. What are queries in DBMS?

A query is a request or command to retrieve or manipulate data from a database. It is a means of asking the database a question or requesting specific information based on certain criteria or conditions. 

Queries are one of the most important features of a DBMS, as they enable users to interact with and retrieve information from the database.

It can take many forms, depending on the type and complexity of the information requested. 

13. What are the different types of DBMS queries?

The different types of queries in database management system include:

SELECT queries: 

Their role is to retrieve specific data from one or more tables in a database. They can also be used to aggregate data, sort results, and apply filters or conditions.

UPDATE queries: 

Used to modify data in a table or set of tables. They can be used to add, update, or delete data based on certain conditions.

INSERT queries: 

The role of such queries is to add new data to a table or set of tables in a database.

DELETE queries: 

Generally implemented to remove data from a table or set of tables in a database based on certain conditions.

JOIN queries: 

These are used to combine data from multiple tables based on a common field or key.

14. What is hashing in DBMS?

Hashing is a technique used to quickly locate data in a large database by assigning it a unique code or hash value. 

Think of it like a fingerprint for data.

Here’s how it works: 

When data is inserted into a database, a hash function is used to generate a unique hash value based on the data. This hash value is then used to index the data, making it faster to search for and retrieve the data later on.

Example

Let’s say you have a database of customers, and you want to quickly find the record for a customer named John Smith. Instead of searching through the entire database for the record, the hash value for John Smith’s record can be calculated and used to directly access the record.

15. What is super key in DBMS?

It is a set of one or more attributes that uniquely identifies each record in a table. A super key is a broader concept than a primary key, which is a specific type of super key that is chosen to be the primary means of identifying records in a table.

Example

Consider a table of customers that includes attributes such as name, address, and phone number. A super key for this table could be a combination of the name and address attributes, since no two customers with the same name and address can exist in the table. 

Another super key could be the phone number attribute, since each customer is likely to have a unique phone number.

However, a super key may contain more attributes than are strictly necessary to uniquely identify each record in the table. 

For example, a customer table could have a super key that includes both the name and address attributes, as well as the phone number attribute. This super key would still uniquely identify each record in the table, but it would be more complex than a primary key that only included the name and address attributes.

When preparing for interview questions and answers on DBMS, you simply can’t miss out on topics like super key.

16. Explain different levels of data abstraction in a DBMS.

A Database Management System allows users to interact with a database through different levels of data abstraction. These levels provide different views of the data and help to simplify the process of working with large and complex databases.

Physical level: 

This is the lowest level of abstraction and deals with the physical storage of data on the storage media. It is concerned with the representation of data on the storage media, such as the way data is stored on a hard drive or solid-state drive. 

It includes details such as data block size, data access methods, and disk space management.

Logical level: 

This level deals with the logical structure of the database, such as the tables, views, and indexes. 

It provides an abstraction of the physical storage layer and allows users to interact with the database in a more user-friendly way. It is concerned with the organization of data and the relationships between different data elements.

View level: 

This is the highest level of abstraction and deals with the user’s view of the data. It provides a way for users to access and manipulate the data without needing to understand the underlying physical or logical structures. 

It includes user-defined views, security mechanisms, and data integrity constraints.

17. What is ER model in DBMS?

The ER (Entity-Relationship) model is a popular data modeling technique used in DBMS to represent the entities, attributes, and relationships between data in a conceptual way. 

It provides a visual representation of the database and helps to design and maintain complex databases.

In the ER model, data is represented using entities, which are objects or concepts with a distinct identity, such as a customer, product, or order. Each entity has attributes that describe its characteristics, such as the name, age, or address of a customer.

Entities in the ER model are connected by relationships, which describe how the entities interact with each other. Relationships can be one-to-one, one-to-many, or many-to-many, and they can have cardinality constraints that specify the minimum and maximum number of entities that can be involved in the relationship.

18. Explain Entity, Entity Type, and Entity Set.

Entity

It is a real-world object or concept that is represented as a table in a database. An entity can be a physical object, such as a car or a person. Or, it can be an abstract concept, such as an order or a transaction.

Entity Type

An entity type is a collection of similar entities. 

For example, the entity type “customer” would include all the individual customers in a database. 

Each entity type has a set of attributes that describe its characteristics, such as the name, age, or address of a customer.

Entity Set

An entity set is a collection of all the entities of a particular entity type in a database. 

For example, the entity set “customer” would include all the individual customers in a database. 

An entity set can be thought of as a table in a database, where each row represents an individual entity and each column represents an attribute of the entity.

19. What do you understand by a weak entity set?

It is an entity set that does not have a primary key attribute. This type of entity set depends on another entity set, called a strong entity set, for its existence. A weak entity set has a partial key, which is a set of attributes that identifies a particular weak entity within its strong entity set.

Example:

Consider an entity set “order_item” that represents the items in an order. Each order item is associated with an order, represented by the strong entity set “order“. The order_item entity set cannot exist without the order entity set, as each order item must be associated with an order. In this case, “order” is the strong entity set, and “order_item” is the weak entity set.

In a DBMS, a weak entity set is identified using a double rectangle notation. The partial key of the weak entity set is indicated using a dashed underline. 

The relationship between the weak entity set and its strong entity set is represented using a diamond-shaped symbol, with the line connecting the diamond to the weak entity set.

20. What are the different types of relationships between tables in a database management system?

There are three main types of relationships that can exist between tables in a DBMS:

One-to-One (1:1) 

In a one-to-one relationship, each row in one table corresponds to exactly one row in another table, and vice versa. 

This type of relationship is not commonly used in practice, but it can be useful for breaking down a large table into smaller, more manageable tables.

One-to-Many (1:N) 

In a one-to-many relationship, each row in one table can correspond to one or more rows in another table, but each row in the second table corresponds to only one row in the first table. 

For example, in a customer and orders database, one customer can have many orders, but each order is associated with only one customer.

Many-to-Many (N:M)

In a many-to-many relationship, each row in one table can correspond to one or more rows in another table, and vice versa. 

For example, in a database for a library, many books can be borrowed by many users, creating a many-to-many relationship between the users and books tables. To represent such a relationship, a junction table or a linking table is used, which includes foreign keys to both tables.

It is one of the most asked database management system interview questions nowadays.

21. In a database, what is the difference between intension and extension?

The intension and extension are two important concepts that refer to different aspects of data.

Intension: 

The intension of a database is the logical or conceptual schema that defines the structure of the database. It specifies the data types, relationships, constraints, and other properties of the data that the database will store. 

The intension provides a high-level view of the database that is independent of any specific instance of the data. In other words, it defines what the data should look like and how it should be organized.

Extension: 

The extension of a database is the set of all actual instances of the data stored in the database. It consists of the specific data values that are stored in the database at any given time. The extension represents the actual data that is being used or processed by the system.

Example of intension and extension

To understand the difference between intension and extension, consider an example of a database for a university. 

The intension of the database would specify the structure of the database, such as the tables for students, courses, and enrollment, and the relationships between them. 

Whereas, the extension would consist of the actual data values stored in the database, such as the names and grades of students, course descriptions and schedules, and enrollment records.

Suggested Reading: Top 28 Java 8 Interview Questions and Answers for Experienced (With Free PDF)

22. What is the difference between DELETE and TRUNCATE commands in DBMS?

DELETE and TRUNCATE are two commands used in database management systems to remove data from a table. However, they have some differences in terms of their functionality and performance.

DELETE Command: 

It is used to remove one or more rows from a table. It is a Data Manipulation Language (DML) command that can be used with or without a WHERE clause to specify which rows to delete. 

When a DELETE statement is executed, the rows are deleted one at a time, and the space occupied by the deleted rows is released back to the system for reuse. This command can be rolled back, meaning that it can be undone if necessary.

TRUNCATE Command: 

It is used to remove all rows from a table. It is a Data Definition Language (DDL) command that removes all the data in a table, but not the structure of the table itself. 

When a TRUNCATE statement is executed, the data is removed in a single operation, and the space occupied by the data is released back to the system for reuse. 

The TRUNCATE command cannot be rolled back, meaning that it cannot be undone once it has been executed.

Difference Between DELETE vs TRUNCATE Commands

Here is the quick comparison between the two commands:

DELETE TRUNCATE
Command Type Data Manipulation Language (DML) Data Definition Language (DDL)
Function Removes one or more rows from a table Removes all rows from a table
Speed Slower for large tables Faster for large tables
Rollback Can be rolled back Cannot be rolled back
Table Structure Only removes data rows, not table structure Only removes data, not the table structure
Use Case Removing specific rows from a table Removing all data from a table

23. How many types of keys are there in a database? Explain.

There are mainly four types of keys:

Primary Key: 

A primary key is a unique identifier for a row or record in a table. It is a column or a combination of columns that uniquely identifies each row in a table. 

Primary keys must be unique and cannot contain null values. A table can have only one primary key, and it is used to enforce referential integrity in relationships between tables.

Foreign Key: 

A foreign key is a column or a combination of columns in one table that refers to the primary key of another table. 

It is used to enforce referential integrity between two tables and to establish a relationship between them. A foreign key can have null values, and a table can have multiple foreign keys.

Candidate Key: 

A candidate key is a column or a combination of columns that can be used as a primary key for a table. 

Alternate Key: 

It is a unique identifier for a row or record in a table and can be used as an alternative to the primary key. A table can have multiple candidate keys, but only one primary key.

An alternate key is a candidate key that is not selected as the primary key. 

It is a unique identifier for a row or record in a table, but it is not used as the primary key. An alternate key can be used to enforce unique constraints in a table.

It is one of the important DBMS interview questions for lecturers and assistant professors as well.

24. Explain the main integrity rules in DBMS.

Integrity rules in DBMS are a set of constraints that ensure the correctness and consistency of data in a database. These rules help to maintain data accuracy, prevent data duplication, and ensure the reliability of data.

It is among the most asked DBMS interview questions for experienced professionals.

There are mainly four types of integrity rules in DBMS:

Entity Integrity Rule: 

The entity integrity rule states that every table in a database must have a primary key that is unique and cannot contain null values. This rule ensures that each row in a table is unique and can be identified using a primary key.

Referential Integrity Rule: 

The referential integrity rule is used to ensure the consistency of data across multiple tables in a database. 

It requires that a foreign key value in a table must match a primary key value in another table, or it must be null. This rule ensures that any changes made to a primary key value in one table are reflected in the related foreign key values in other tables.

Domain Integrity Rule: 

The domain integrity rule specifies that each column in a table must contain only valid data that adheres to a specific data type, range, or domain. This rule ensures that the data in a table is consistent and accurate.

User-defined Integrity Rule: 

User-defined integrity rules are customized rules created by a database administrator to enforce specific business rules or policies. 

These rules can be defined as triggers, stored procedures, or functions that are executed when specific conditions are met.

25. Explain the different levels of data abstraction in DBMS.

Physical Level: 

There are mainly three levels of data abstraction:

The physical level is the lowest level of data abstraction, which describes how data is actually stored on the physical storage devices such as hard disks, tapes, and memory. 

This level deals with the details of how data is stored, organized, and accessed on the physical storage media.

Logical Level: 

The logical level is the next level of data abstraction, which describes the logical structure of data in a database. 

It deals with the way data is viewed by users and applications. The logical level hides the physical storage details and provides a conceptual view of the data, including the relationships between data elements, tables, and their attributes.

View Level: 

The view level is the highest level of data abstraction, which describes how data is presented to users and applications. 

This level deals with the way data is viewed and accessed by users and applications. Views provide a customized and simplified view of the data according to the specific needs of different users and applications.

26. What is deadlock in DBMS?

A deadlock is a situation that occurs when two or more transactions are waiting for each other to release resources, such as locks on database objects, that they need to complete their respective transactions. 

As a result, none of the transactions can proceed, and the system becomes stuck or deadlocked.

When a deadlock occurs, the only way to resolve it is to terminate one or more of the transactions involved, which can result in loss of data and system downtime.

27. How can you prevent a deadlock situation?

To prevent deadlocks, DBMS uses various techniques, such as transaction scheduling, lock management, and timeout mechanisms. 

For example, DBMS may use lock-based concurrency control to ensure that transactions do not interfere with each other and deadlock does not occur. In addition, DBMS may use timeout mechanisms to detect and resolve deadlocks automatically by terminating one or more of the transactions involved.

It is essential to design the database and the application carefully to prevent deadlocks. This can include optimizing queries to minimize locking and reducing the time that transactions hold locks on resources. 

Additionally, database administrators should monitor the system for deadlocks and take steps to prevent them from occurring, such as adjusting the concurrency control settings or modifying the database schema to reduce contention for resources.

28. How can a database be secured against unauthorized access and data breaches?

There are several ways to secure a database against unauthorized access and data breaches, including:

Implementing Access Controls

This involves implementing a system of user authentication and authorization that ensures only authorized users can access the database. This can be done through various methods such as role-based access control, multi-factor authentication, and encryption.

Encrypting Sensitive Data

Encrypting sensitive data can help protect it from being accessed by unauthorized users. This can be done at rest and in transit, using various encryption algorithms and protocols.

Regularly Updating and Patching the Database

Regularly updating and patching the database can help ensure that known vulnerabilities are addressed and that the database is running on the latest version with all the necessary security patches.

Implementing Auditing and Monitoring

This involves monitoring database activity and generating audit logs to track who is accessing the database, when, and what they are doing. This can help detect suspicious activity and prevent unauthorized access.

Implementing Backup and Recovery Procedures 

Implementing regular backup and recovery procedures can help ensure that data is not lost in case of a security breach or other disaster. This can also help prevent ransomware attacks where the attacker threatens to delete or leak the data unless a ransom is paid.

Conducting Regular Security Assessments

Conducting regular security assessments can help identify vulnerabilities in the database and help take corrective action before they can be exploited by attackers.

So, while preparing for interview questions on database management system, make sure to know the answer to such tough and tricky topics.

Basics of DBMS for Interview Preparation

Here are some of the basic concepts of DBMS:

Data 

Data is the basic building block of a database. It refers to the facts and figures that are stored in the database.

Database

It is a collection of related data that is stored in an organized and structured way. It is designed to store, organize, and manage large amounts of data.

Tables

It is a basic structure in which data is stored in a database. It consists of rows and columns, where each row represents a record and each column represents a field or attribute.

Records

It is a set of related fields or attributes that describe a single instance of an entity or object. It represents a single row in a table.

Fields

It is a single piece of information that is stored in a database. It represents a single column in a table.

Primary key

It is a unique identifier that is used to identify each record in a table. It is used to ensure that each record in the table is unique and can be easily accessed.

Foreign key

It is a key that is used to link two or more tables in a database. It is used to establish relationships between tables.

Queries

A query is a request for data from a database. It is used to retrieve, update, or delete data from tables.

Indexes

It is a data structure that is used to accelerate the retrieval of data from a database. It is used to organize data in a specific order to optimize the performance of queries.

Transaction

It is a sequence of database operations that are treated as a single unit of work. Transactions are used to ensure the integrity and consistency of data in a database.

These are some of the basic concepts of DBMS. Understanding these concepts is essential along with preparing for the DBMS important questions and answers, as discussed above.

DBMS Interview Questions and Answers PDF (Free Download)

You can continue your preparation by downloading the DBMS interview questions PDF for free from the link below.

DOWNLOAD NOW

Company-Wise DBMS Interview Questions

In this section, we have covered the database management system interview questions asked at top companies, MNCs, and large enterprises. 

TCS (Tata Consultancy Services)

TCS (Tata Consultancy Services)

The list of DBMS interview questions for TCS:

  • What is DBMS, and how is it different from a file system?
  • What are the different types of relationships in a database?
  • What is normalization, and why is it important?
  • What is an index in a database, and why is it used?
  • What is a trigger, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is a deadlock, and how can it be prevented?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a unique key?
  • What is the ACID properties in DBMS?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index?

Infosys

Infosys

Here is the list of DBMS interview questions for Infosys:

  • What is normalization, and how is it achieved in a database?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a foreign key?
  • What is the purpose of a join in a database, and what are the different types of joins?
  • What is a view in a database, and how is it used?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index?
  • What is a trigger in a database, and how is it used?
  • What is the difference between a database and a schema?
  • What are the different types of database users, and what are their roles?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?

Capegemini

Capegemini

List of DBMS interview questions for Capegemini:

  • What is a database, and what are the advantages of using a database management system?
  • What are the different types of normalization, and how is each achieved?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a unique key?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index, and when would you use each?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is a deadlock, and how can it be prevented?
  • What is a view, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a left outer join and a right outer join?
  • What is the difference between a schema and a database?

Cognizant

Cognizant

List of top DBMS interview questions for Cognizant:

  • What is normalization, and how is it achieved in a database?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a foreign key?
  • What is the purpose of a join in a database, and what are the different types of joins?
  • What is an index in a database, and why is it used?
  • What is a trigger, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index, and when would you use each?
  • What is a view, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is the difference between a database and a schema?

Accenture

Accenture

Common DBMS interview questions for Accenture:

  • What is a database, and what are the advantages of using a database management system?
  • What is normalization, and how is it achieved in a database?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a unique key?
  • What is a clustered index, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a left outer join and a right outer join?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is a view, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a schema and a database?
  • What is a trigger, and how is it used in a database?

IBM

IBM

Most asked interview questions on DBMS at IBM:

  • What is a database, and what are the advantages of using a database management system?
  • What is normalization, and how is it achieved in a database?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a foreign key?
  • What is the purpose of an index in a database, and what are the different types of indexes?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a trigger, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index, and when would you use each?
  • What is a view, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is the difference between a schema and a database?

Deloitte

Deloitte

Top DBMS interview questions for Deloitte are:

  • What is a database, and what are the advantages of using a database management system?
  • What is normalization, and how is it achieved in a database?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a foreign key?
  • What is an index in a database, and why is it used?
  • What is a trigger, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index, and when would you use each?
  • What is a view, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is the difference between a schema and a database?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?

Amazon

Amazon

Amazon DBMS interview questions include:

  • What is a database, and what are the advantages of using a database management system?
  • What is normalization, and how is it achieved in a database?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a foreign key?
  • What is an index in a database, and why is it used?
  • What is a trigger, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index, and when would you use each?
  • What is a view, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is the difference between a schema and a database?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is ACID, and how is it important in a database system?
  • What is NoSQL, and when would you use it over a traditional relational database?

HCL

The list of HCL DBMS interview questions include:

  • What is a database, and what are the advantages of using a database management system?
  • What is normalization, and how is it achieved in a database?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a foreign key?
  • What is an index in a database, and why is it used?
  • What is a trigger, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index, and when would you use each?
  • What is a view, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is the difference between a schema and a database?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is database replication, and how is it used in a distributed database environment?
  • What is the difference between a OLTP and OLAP database, and when would you use each?

Wipro

Wipro

Here are the main Wipro DBMS interview questions:

  • What is a database, and what are the advantages of using a database management system?
  • What is normalization, and how is it achieved in a database?
  • What is the difference between a primary key and a foreign key?
  • What is an index in a database, and why is it used?
  • What is a trigger, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a clustered and non-clustered index, and when would you use each?
  • What is a view, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is a transaction, and what are the properties of a transaction?
  • What is the difference between a schema and a database?
  • What is a stored procedure, and how is it used in a database?
  • What is the difference between a database backup and a database restore?
  • What is data mining, and how is it used in a database environment?

Note:

Please note that these questions are not exhaustive, and the interviewer may ask additional questions based on your responses. You should also be prepared to discuss your previous experience with DBMS and provide examples of projects you have worked on, particularly those that involved large-scale databases or data analytics.

DBMS Interview Questions MCQ (Objective Type)

Here are some common multiple-choice questions (MCQs) related to DBMS that may be asked in a job interview:

1. What is a DBMS?

a) A program that creates and maintains a database

b) A program that creates and manages tables in a database

c) A program that allows users to access and manipulate data in a database

d) None of the above

Answer: a) 

2. What is normalization in DBMS?

a) The process of creating a database

b) The process of removing redundancy from the database

c) The process of adding redundancy to the database

d) None of the above

Answer: b) 

3. What is a primary key in DBMS?

a) A column or combination of columns that uniquely identifies each row in a table

b) A column that contains only unique values

c) A column that cannot contain null values

d) All of the above

Answer: a) 

4. What is an index in DBMS?

a) A database object that allows for faster data retrieval

b) A database object that enforces data integrity rules

c) A database object that creates a copy of the table

d) None of the above

Answer: a) 

5. What is a transaction in DBMS?

a) A group of SQL statements that are executed as a single unit

b) A group of tables in a database

c) A group of rows in a table

d) None of the above

Answer: a) 

6. What is a foreign key in DBMS?

a) A column or combination of columns that uniquely identifies each row in a table

b) A column that contains only unique values

c) A column that references the primary key of another table

d) None of the above

Answer: c) 

7. The difference between a view and a table is:

a) There is no difference

b) A table stores data, while a view is a virtual table that displays data from one or more tables

c) A view stores data, while a table is a virtual table that displays data from one or more views

d) None of the above

Answer: b)

8. What is the purpose of the GROUP BY clause in SQL?

a) To group rows with the same values in a particular column

b) To sort rows in a table

c) To select columns from a table

d) None of the above

Answer: a) 

9. What is a trigger in DBMS?

a) A program that executes automatically in response to a particular event in the database

b) A program that creates a backup of the database

c) A program that retrieves data from the database

d) None of the above

Answer: a) 

10. What is the difference between a transaction and a query in DBMS?

a) There is no difference

b) A transaction modifies data in the database, while a query retrieves data from the database

c) A query modifies data in the database, while a transaction retrieves data from the database

d) None of the above

Answer: b) 

11. What is the purpose of a stored procedure in DBMS?

a) To create a backup of the database

b) To retrieve data from the database

c) To perform a specific task or set of tasks in the database

d) None of the above

Answer: c)

12. What is a deadlock in DBMS?

a) A situation where two or more transactions are waiting for each other to release locks on data

b) A situation where two or more tables are linked by foreign keys

c) A situation where a table has no primary key

d) None of the above

Answer: a) 

DBMS Interview Questions and Answers PDF

DBMS Interview FAQs

Q1. What is DBMS interview questions?

DBMS interview questions may cover a wide range of topics related to the design, development, implementation, and maintenance of databases. For people preparing for a job in this field, it are important to crack it.

Q2. How to prepare for DBMS interview?

Preparing for a DBMS interview requires a combination of theoretical knowledge and practical skills. 

Here are some steps to help you prepare for an interview:

Review the basics
Ensure that you have a strong understanding of the fundamentals of database concepts, such as data modeling, normalization, SQL, indexing, and transaction management.

Practice with examples
Work through some practical examples of designing and implementing databases, using SQL to query and manipulate data, and implementing various DBMS features such as indexing and transactions. This will help you become more familiar with the tools and techniques used in the field.

Stay up-to-date
Keep up-to-date with the latest trends and developments in the DBMS field by reading industry publications, attending conferences, and following blogs and social media accounts of DBMS experts.

Prepare for common questions
Review common DBMS interview questions and prepare your answers. Practice your responses with a friend or mentor, and be sure to highlight your experience and skills in database design, development, and maintenance.

Be confident
Remember to approach the interview with confidence, and be ready to discuss your experience and skills in a clear and concise manner. Emphasize your ability to work collaboratively with others and your problem-solving skills.

Q3. What are the top DBMS commands interview questions?

Here are some of the top DBMS interview questions on commands:

– What is SQL, and what are its different types of commands?
– What is a SELECT statement, and what are some of its common clauses?
– How do you insert data into a table using SQL?
– What is a JOIN, and what are the different types of JOINs in SQL?
– What is a WHERE clause, and how is it used in SQL queries?
– How do you update data in a table using SQL?
– What is a GROUP BY clause, and how is it used in SQL?
– What is a subquery, and how is it used in SQL?
– What is a UNION, and how is it used in SQL?
– How do you delete data from a table using SQL?

Q4. What are the most important DBMS topics for interview?

The most important DBMS topics for an interview will depend on the specific job and the company’s requirements. 

However, here are some of the most common and important DBMS topics that interviewers may focus on:

– Relational database concepts and normalization
– SQL commands, syntax, and usage
– Data modeling and database design
– Database architecture and DBMS types
– Indexing and query optimization techniques
– Transaction management and concurrency control
– Backup and recovery strategies
– Data security and access control
– Data warehousing and business intelligence
– Big data and NoSQL databases

Having a good understanding of these topics can demonstrate your knowledge and experience in the field of DBMS, and increase your chances of getting hired for a position that requires working with databases. 

Be prepared to discuss your experience and skills in each of these areas, and provide specific examples of how you have applied them in previous projects or work experiences.

Q5. Who is DBA (Database Administrator)?

A DBA (Database Administrator) is a professional responsible for the design, implementation, and maintenance of databases in an organization. The DBA’s main role is to ensure the efficient and reliable operation of a company’s database systems

Q6. What are the responsibilities of a Database Administrator?

Some of the responsibilities of a DBA include:

– Designing and implementing databases that meet the organization’s needs and requirements.
– Setting up and configuring database systems and software.
– Ensuring the security and integrity of the database by implementing access controls and backup and recovery strategies.
– Monitoring database performance and optimizing database performance by implementing indexing and query optimization techniques.
– Troubleshooting and resolving database issues.
– Upgrading and patching database software to ensure that it is up-to-date and secure.
– Developing and implementing policies and procedures for database use and management.
– Working closely with developers, system administrators, and other IT staff to ensure that the database is integrated with other systems and applications.

Q7. What is the average salary of a DBA (Database Administrator) in India?

The salary of a DBA (Database Administrator) in India can vary depending on several factors, including the level of experience, skills, industry, location, and company. 

According to Glassdoor, the average salary for a Database Administrator in India is around INR 7.1 Lakh per year.

Q8. Which DBMS is easy to learn?

The ease of learning a DBMS depends on several factors, including the user’s prior experience with databases, programming skills, and the complexity of the system. 

However, some DBMS are generally considered to be easier to learn than others, including:

MySQL
MySQL is a popular open-source DBMS that is widely used in web development. It is known for its ease of use and simplicity, and it has a large and active community that provides support and resources for learning.

SQLite
SQLite is a lightweight, file-based DBMS that is often used for mobile and embedded applications. It is easy to set up and use, and it requires minimal configuration or administration.

Microsoft Access
Microsoft Access is a desktop-based DBMS that is part of the Microsoft Office suite. It is easy to use and provides a graphical user interface for designing and managing databases.

PostgreSQL
PostgreSQL is a powerful open-source DBMS that is known for its reliability and scalability. Although it is more complex than some other DBMS, it has a strong community and provides extensive documentation and resources for learning.

Wrapping Up:

In conclusion, DBMS is a crucial component of modern information systems, and having a strong understanding of its principles and concepts is essential for anyone looking to work in the field of database management. This blog post has provided a comprehensive overview of DBMS interview questions and answers, covering a range of topics from data modeling to database design, normalization, and query optimization.

By mastering these interview questions and answers, you’ll be better equipped to succeed in your job search, improve your skills as a database manager, and provide high-quality instruction to your students.

The post 50+ Top DBMS Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
Top 30 Email Marketing Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/top-email-marketing-interview-questions-answers/ https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/top-email-marketing-interview-questions-answers/#respond Tue, 30 Jul 2024 12:49:29 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=1190 Find the full list of top email marketing interview questions and answers to land your dream job! Email Marketing is one of the most powerful digital marketing channels, used by 4.03 billion people around the world. In email marketing, a company sends marketing-related emails to build brand equity, develop relationships with customers, and grow revenue....

The post Top 30 Email Marketing Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

Find the full list of top email marketing interview questions and answers to land your dream job!

Email Marketing is one of the most powerful digital marketing channels, used by 4.03 billion people around the world. In email marketing, a company sends marketing-related emails to build brand equity, develop relationships with customers, and grow revenue.

If you’re planning to apply for a new job as a professional email marketer, then you must be able to answer these common email marketing interview questions

The company will look for candidates who have previous experience in integrating email campaigns into larger marketing strategies. They will ask you questions about your previous projects and your way of working. So, if you have done an online digital marketing course that includes practical modules on email marketing, then answering the interview questions will be easier for you.

Upskill Yourself With Live Training (Book Free Class)

Digital Marketing Course SEO Course
Performance Marketing Course Google Ads Course

email marketing interview questions and answers

Top Email Marketing Interview Questions and Answers

Let us look at some frequently asked email marketing interview questions with answers:

1. What is email marketing?

Email marketing is the process of sending electronic mails to potential customers to build a relationship with them. It is a form of direct marketing used to promote the brand, product, or service.

Email marketing may involve advertisements, solicitation of donations or sales, or business requests. 

2. How many emails should you send to the customers?

Sending messages two or three times each month will leave enough time in between and prevent you from landing in spam. Choosing four times a month will maintain the consistency of one mail per week. 

However, you need to closely check the open and withdrawal rates. And you’ll have to diminish the mail-sending frequency if you see a decline in the engagement rates. 

3. What is the best time to send emails?

Mornings and weekends are considered the best times to send emails. However, time may vary according to your target audience, email lists, and recipients. Businesses need to find the specific details as in what time zone the subscriber is in and the server’s activeness for speedy reachability.

Suggested ReadingSEO vs SEM Difference in Digital Marketing: Explained in Simple Terms

4. What is the best email marketing campaign that you’ve created?

This is one of the most asked email marketing interview questions for experienced professionals. It is your chance to show professional knowledge.

The best answer would be to walk them through the best campaign that you ever created and point out specifics about the subject line, preheader text, tone of the text, and the imagery that was used. Bonus points if you can discuss the intended audience and why the email was geared toward them.

5. What is the difference between soft and hard bounce emails?

An email bounce occurs when the email is not delivered to the email address you intended to send it to.

Hard Bounce:

A hard bounce indicates a permanent delivery failure. The email could not be delivered due to an incorrect or invalid email address, etc.

Soft Bounce:

A soft bounce is an email that gets as far as the recipient’s mail server but bounces back due to a deliverability issue. This could be due to a temporary issue; in most cases, it is because the recipient’s inbox is full, the file size is too large, or the server is down.

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

Digital Marketing Interview Questions SEO Interview Questions
Email Marketing Interview Questions Content Writing Interview Questions

6. What metrics do you use to measure the success of an email campaign?

The choice of metrics would depend upon the goals of the campaign. Other than those, some commonly used metrics to measure the success of a campaign are:

  • Click Rate
  • Open Rate
  • Subscription Rate
  • Conversions
  • Reply Rate
  • CTR ( Click through Rate)
  • Increase in referral business
  • Increase in website traffic

7. How will you grow our email subscriber list?

It is among the top email marketing interview questions because that’s where the success of a campaign depends on.

The accomplishment of email advertising is correspondent to the email list you make. That’s why growing an email list is such an essential interview question.

The best methods to develop an email subscriber list are:

  • Creating some productive and unique email content
  • Empowering your current subscribers to forward messages of some exclusive offers and discounts
  • Utilizing social media platforms to advance distinctive offers
  • Revitalize the old email list with an opt-in campaign.
  • Create a new lead generation offer, like a free eBook or whitepaper, and expect guests to provide their email addresses. 
  • Gather email addresses at occasions like seminars, and public exhibitions and import them into your database.

Suggested ReadingTop 10 Free Email Marketing Tools in 2023

8. How to prevent emails from landing in spam?

You can follow the following steps to prevent your email from landing in spam:

  • Always get permission to send emails.
  • Keep the length of the subject line under 45 characters.
  • Don’t use too bright elements, underscores, and bold print. 
  • Don’t use a lot of exclamation marks, or CAPS LOCK key, and limit the use of numbers in the subject line.
  • Check if your domain name has been blacklisted.
  • Monitor your deliverability
  • Utilize email spam checkers to improve your likelihood of landing in the inbox.
  • If you want to deliver an important message to multiple groups, you better use the BCC function.

9. What are the important points to consider in the email checklist?

You must follow the below email marketing checklist:

  • The subject line should be concise and direct.
  • The purpose of the email should be clear and must have only the essential information. 
  • Documents supporting your email should be attached.
  • Use a proper greeting.
  • While proofreading, check the correct usage of grammar and spelling.
  • Run a spam check and customize your content accordingly

10. Define Click-through Rate, Open Rate, and Unsubscribe Rate in email marketing.

In your list of interview questions for email marketing, you must include these points because the meaning of CTR, open rate, and unsubscribe rate are vital to know.

a) Click-through Rate

The Click-through rate for email is the percentage of people who clicked on at least one link in your email message. It is calculated by dividing the total number of people who clicked on the link by the number of impressions and multiplying that ratio by 100 to know the CTR percentage. Your CTR would be 40% if 40 out of 100 people clicked on your link. 

b) Open Rate

It refers to the number of people in your email list who opened your email message. Usually, the open rate is expressed as a percentage, and a 30% open rate would mean that three of every ten emails delivered to the inbox were opened.

c) Unsubscribe Rate

The number of people who have unsubscribed from your emails is known as unsubscribes. It is calculated by dividing the number of unsubscribes by the successful email deliveries multiplied by 100. 

Digital marketing Course

List of Interview Questions for Email Marketing Specialist

Email marketing specialists create and execute strategies aimed at improving knowledge about products and services. This is a specialized form of digital marketing.

The interviewer will test your proficiency in a variety of email marketing tools and techniques, and your capacity to tailor your approach to maximize uptake within the target audience. Some of the primary interview questions for email marketing for experienced professionals are:

  1. What email tracking tools do you know or have used before?
  2. How do you find out the most optimal days and times to send sales emails?
  3. What email metrics do you monitor? Which is more insightful: click-through rate or open rate? Why?
  4. List some characteristics of a mobile-friendly email.
  5. How do you proofread email content for clarity and accuracy?
  6. Based on our products/services, what kind of audience would fit our email campaign and why?
  7. Which google analytics reports are the most useful and why?
  8. What’s the best way to ensure the emails don’t end up in the spam folder?
  9. Explain Forward rate and Churn rate.
  10. What are the various types of email marketing campaigns?

B2B Email Marketing Interview Questions for 2025

Email marketing manager improves user engagement and generates sales through effective email marketing strategies. Hence, the interviewer will look for the ideal candidate who has experience in integrating email campaigns into marketing strategies. 

Make sure you revise all your past knowledge, as there’ll be questions about your experience in email marketing. Some of the B2B email marketing interview questions that you can prepare are:

  1. We want to increase our newsletter subscribers. What would you suggest?
  2. What do you know about A/B tests?
  3. Tell us about the most successful email marketing campaign that you have created.
  4. How did you react to an email marketing campaign that failed?
  5. Why should we use email marketing in the era of social media?
  6. Which companies currently do email marketing well?
  7. What email service providers (ESPs) have you worked with?
  8. What revenue do you drive using email campaigns?
  9. Did any of your email marketing campaigns fail? What would you do differently?
  10. How would you engage past customers who haven’t purchased anything for a while?

Email Marketing Interview Questions and Answers PDF Download Here

Conclusion:

The aforestated list of questions covers most of the important questions from a job interview perspective. However, the level of questions varies as per the years of experience and the job profile you applied for. 

Walk into the interview with confidence and answer what you are sure of. Go get the job; we’re cheering you on!

The post Top 30 Email Marketing Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/top-email-marketing-interview-questions-answers/feed/ 0
30+ Digital Marketing Interview Questions & Answers 2025 (With PDF) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/digital-marketing-interview-questions-answers/ https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/digital-marketing-interview-questions-answers/#respond Tue, 30 Jul 2024 12:41:06 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=1104 What are some of the most common digital marketing interview questions? How to answer them? Whether you are a fresher, intern, experienced, or a manager, we have covered some top questions asked in a digital marketing interview.  Everyone is aware of the basic rules about preparing for an interview, like – pick a nice clean,...

The post 30+ Digital Marketing Interview Questions & Answers 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

What are some of the most common digital marketing interview questions? How to answer them? Whether you are a fresher, intern, experienced, or a manager, we have covered some top questions asked in a digital marketing interview. 

Everyone is aware of the basic rules about preparing for an interview, like – pick a nice clean, corporate wear, don’t wear too much perfume, and thoroughly research the company beforehand. These are the simple rules to follow, but when you receive a call for a job interview, with a lot of happiness, a few terror kicks in when you think, “how to prepare for a digital marketing job interview?

We know job interviews can instill fear even in the smartest of candidates. You look for answers to many questions like “what will they ask?”, “What are some common questions asked in a digital marketing interview?”, “what if they ask anything that I don’t know?”, etc. 

Upskill Yourself With Live Training (Book Free Class)

Digital Marketing Course SEO Course
Performance Marketing Course Google Ads Course

It’s obvious to think of these questions. But, you need to keep yourself calm, and your mind focused. Let’s look at some tips to prepare for a digital marketing interview. 

Must read: Why Learn Digital Marketing? Benefits, Career, Salary

Digital Marketing Interview Tips

1. Prepare, Research, and Know Your Stuff

Before going for an interview, you need to prepare thoroughly to come across as a confident candidate. You need to demonstrate why you are the perfect candidate for the particular job role and your passion for the job and company. 

Your research should be focused on: how your experience fits the role’s requirements, what the brand is trying to achieve, and what can you do for the brand to achieve the goal?

Since it is a digital marketing interview, you should know what they are doing online. Investigate all possible marketing avenues like Twitter, SEO, newsletter subscriptions, and LinkedIn.

As you conduct your research, note down all the important points, write down the suggestions if you have any and how you could improve their digital presence. If you are asked for suggestions in the interview, you can then answer. 

Additionally, if you are a fresher or intern, then it makes sense to go for an advanced digital marketing course to acquire the essential skills. 

2. It’s Okay to Not Know Everything

Digital marketing is a varied field, with everything from SEO to social media marketing to marketing automation falling under the digital umbrella. 

digital marketing interview questions and answers

If you can do most of the job as described in the job role but are a little shaky in one or two areas, don’t panic. Rather make your point clear. 

For example, if SEO isn’t your strong skill, but it’s something the eligible candidate has to work on, you can say something like, “While my previous roles didn’t allow for much SEO experience, I’ve taken it upon myself to learn this skill and stay updated.” The interviewer will appreciate your honesty and your initiative to learn more.

If you want to prepare yourself for an SEO job, then acquire the required skills with an SEO course

3. Talk in Figures & Achievements

No one likes to listen to a long story in an interview. The interviewer wants to hear short and crisp answers with figures and achievements. 

You can easily secure the job profile by preparing a few stories from your career that highlight your creativity and ability to succeed in the role.

All you need to do is – take out your CV and the job description. Now go through each requirement listed for the job and note down similar achievements you accomplished in the previous roles. For example, if one of the requirements is to grow the brand’s online presence, you can let them know of the time when you smashed your KPI of a particular campaign.

Now flesh out each point, keeping your stories short and simple. Start with the why – why your company felt it was important to achieve this particular goal at the time, then add a KPI (the figure you had to achieve), the timeframe it took to achieve that goal, how you did it, and lastly, your outcome. 

Digital Marketing Interview Questions and Answers For Freshers

Whether you are new to the digital marketing field or a professional, attending a job interview is a part of the process of pursuing the job you have always dreamt of. To make a good impression on the interviewers, you must practice some below-mentioned entry level digital marketing interview questions and answers.

Q. What is the role of social media in digital marketing?

Ans. Social media is an important pillar of digital marketing. And in this digital world, with the increase in social media users, interviewers are likely to question you about your social media knowledge.

The use of social media is very important in digital marketing. It is fast, convenient, and has an extensive outreach across different demographics. You can post images, videos, and other content to increase your audience engagement and website traffic. These strategies will help you to get more conversions, build better brand awareness and achieve your marketing goals.

Q. What do you understand by digital marketing?

Ans. Digital marketing is all about the tactics used for building a brand via online channels. It includes various techniques like SEO, SEM, Email Marketing, Link building, PPC, Affiliate Marketing, etc.

Q. What are the most effective ways to increase traffic to your website?

Ans. The best and effective ways to increase traffic to your website are-

  • Paid search
  • Content marketing
  • Content optimization
  • Display advertising
  • Linking Internally
  • Posting content on LinkedIn
  • Writing crisp headlines
  • SEO activities
  • Guest blogging
  • Email marketing
  • Targeting long-tail keywords
  • Seeking referral traffic

Q. What are the different types of Digital Marketing?

Ans. Different Digital Marketing aspects are –

Digital Marketing Interview Questions for Internship

While preparing for an internship interview, be clear that the interviewer just wants to see how confident you are and not your theoretical knowledge. So, he will probably ask some simple questions related to digital marketing or questions about you.

digital marketing interview questions and answers for freshers

Q. Why are you interested in pursuing a career in digital marketing?

Ans. Explain the reasons why you are keen on choosing digital marketing as your career and the challenges you are looking forward to facing. Some of the answers can be –

  • A career in digital marketing is high in demand in the present and in the near future, so you want to pursue a career in it. 
  • Digital Marketing is an ever-changing field, and you want to have a career that has such fast-paced changes, as you want to keep learning something new.
  • You are inclined towards creativity & technology, and digital marketing gives you that opportunity to explore both.

Q. What is the difference between marketing and sales?

Ans. This question is sometimes asked if you’re a fresher to know your mindset. The job interviewer wants to know if you are aware of the functions of both departments. Many a time, when the candidate is not from the marketing background, tends to mix up the two. In a nutshell, marketing is about building awareness and bringing in leads, while sales is about closing those leads.

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

Digital Marketing Interview Questions SEO Interview Questions
Email Marketing Interview Questions Content Writing Interview Questions

Questions Asked in Digital Marketing Job Interview

Questions asked in the job interview depend on various aspects like job position, job role, the company, and the interviewer. Let’s see the kind of questions that can be asked in a digital marketing job interview.

Q. Explain PPC or Pay Per Click advertising.

Ans. Pay-Per-Click (PPC) is also known as Cost Per Click is an online advertising model used to direct traffic to websites. In this technique, advertisers pay a fee to the publisher (website owner or host of the website) every time when the ad is clicked. In other words, it is the amount spent to get an advertisement clicked.

Q. Describe SEO. 

Ans. Search Engine Optimization is the art and science of increasing the quantity and quality of website traffic by increasing the visibility when the users search for products or services related to any business on search engines. The better visibility of your pages in search results, the more likely you are to grab the attention and attract customers. 

Q. Explain keywords. How important is it for SEO?

Ans. Keywords are the most significant element of Search Engine Optimization. People use keywords to search for a product or service on the internet.

They are important for better rankings in the search engine result pages (SERPs). The keywords you use to include in your content will determine the kind of traffic you want to get to your website. This will help your website’s pages to rank higher in search engines which makes it easier for people to find your website.

seo course

Q. How do you categorize digital marketing?

Ans. Digital marketing is categorized into two segments: 

Inbound Marketing: This technique takes the help of social media, digital content in e-books, e-newsletter, or webinars to increase the number of clicks and learn more about a company and its services.

Outbound Marketing: This segment includes placing ads, cold calls, e-mails, or reach out to potential customers through digital mediums.

Q. What is the difference between SEO and SEM?

Ans. SEO enables your website to appear in search engine results while SEM is search engine marketing to purchase a space on a search engine result page.

seo interview questions and answers

Also Read: How to Become an SEO Expert in 2025?

Q. What can you do to improve your conversion rates?

Ans. The conversion rate can be increased by testing different website elements, especially on a landing page. Also, you can experiment with layout, functionality, and style on landing pages.

Q. What is Google Ads?

Ans. Google Ads is the most popular online advertising service offered by Google to help marketers reach their potential customers. Businesses use this service to display the ads on Google and grow the business. It is the most famous PPC advertising technique in the world. It allows businesses to set a fixed budget for ads, and the payment is made when the users click on the ads. Google Ads service is focused on keywords.

Q. What is on-page SEO and off-page SEO?

Ans. Search engine optimization can be divided into two categories: on-page SEO and off-page SEO. Both are important for the success of an SEO campaign.

On-page SEO focuses on optimizing the parts of your website that are within your control.

Off-page SEO is more about increasing the authority of your domain through content creation and acquiring backlinks from other websites. In simple words, On-page SEO looks at what your site is about and Off-page SEO looks at how popular your website is.

Digital Marketing Executive Interview Questions

Say, if the job position offered to you is for a Digital Marketing Executive, then what can be the expected questions?

The important part of a digital marketing executive’s job is to engage with the community online. This can be achieved through different social media platforms such as Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter. The digital marketeer aims to reinforce the business goal through the posts that are created across social media platforms. Their main motive is to increase interaction and monitor the measurability of the posts in relation to the target audience.

If you’re preparing for a digital marketing executive interview, here is the list of questions you must be prepared for-

Q. What Types of content make up an effective digital marketing campaign?

Ans. Digital content falls under these main categories:

Social Media: a social media presence acts as a tool for amplifying your overall SEO and brand awareness efforts.

Blog Posts: articles that allow you to identify your audience’s problems and ways to solve them.

Guides and eBooks: longer form resources that allow you to explore blog topics at greater length.

Video content: videos that cover topics your audience likes to watch (often posted on platforms like YouTube, which can then be posted on your website).

Podcasts: audio content that can be hosted on your website and downloaded by your audience.

Marketing Emails: newsletters and product announcements sent directly to potential customers.

Q. What are some of the best practices on Twitter?

Ans. Always use hashtags and mentions. This will mean more people can see your tweets and retweets. Some of these people might have big followings that will benefit your company. Twitter is a great tool to have a conversation with customers, so make sure to reply to their tweets as much as possible. Use hashtags to connect the conversation with other conversations on related topics.

Also Read: How to Start a Digital Marketing Agency in 2025- Step-by-Step Guide

Q. Give us an example of a marketing campaign that did not work out and how you handled the situation?

Ans. The interviewer will ask this question to know how you handled a failed plan, as this is an inevitable situation. It is important that you know why the strategy failed and what you learnt from the past experience.

Campaigns may fail due to different reasons, including poor research or groundwork, poor planning, or ineffective communication. Be confident and open about why the campaign failed, take accountability, and focus on what you learnt.

Digital marketing Course

Digital Marketing Manager Interview Questions

Here are some of the questions that can be asked in a job interview for a Digital Marketing Manager.

Q. What are your favorite emerging digital marketing trends?

Ans. If you want to create some creative marketing campaigns, you need to be updated with the latest innovative campaigns. This question will allow the interviewer to know that you follow the latest digital marketing trends. If you have liked any campaign recently, talk about it freely and tell them what did you like the most about the campaign and how you could have used your ideas to make it more innovative.

Q. If we select you for this job, what strategies would you suggest we implement, and why?

Ans. This is a critical question, and the recruiting manager wants to know how you will perform in this specific position.

Tell them about what you are capable of achieving in the future. It’s important to use this opportunity and show how well you are aware of their brand and what value you can bring to this company in the future.

Read some more questions for digital marketing interview for a managerial job role.

  • Talk about one of your most effective campaigns and what made them so effective?
  • How will you handle negative feedback about your brand?
  • How do you know when a campaign has failed? What metrics do you use?
  • What is your approach to structuring a marketing budget?
  • Describe a time you worked with a team to create a campaign on a fixed budget.

Additional Interview Questions for Digital Marketing Job

Let’s look at some more important questions that are expected to be asked in a digital marketing job interview.

  • What are the key areas where you can use keywords to optimize site ranking?
  • What are the characteristics of “bad links”?
  • Explain PPC or Pay Per Click advertising and Google Ads.
  • What are the primary models for determining PPC or pay-per-click?
  • What are the most effective online marketing tools?
  • How is content marketing different from content strategy? Provide some examples of each.
  • What KPIs do you use in social media reporting?
  • Why is digital marketing preferred over traditional marketing?
  • Explain the most effective ways to increase traffic to your website?
  • Describe the sales funnel and why it is important to digital marketing.

Digital Marketing Interview Questions and Answers PDF

The Final Word

Getting an interview call for the role of a digital marketeer is quite exciting. But it’s also important to remember that nailing a job interview requires more than just answering the questions. So keep that in mind, be confident, fearless and prepare the questions provided in this article. We hope that our tips will help you to land your dream job.

All the Best!

Read more blogs:

The post 30+ Digital Marketing Interview Questions & Answers 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/digital-marketing-interview-questions-answers/feed/ 0
Top 65 Java Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With Free PDF) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/java-interview-questions-answers/ Mon, 01 Jul 2024 13:26:31 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=2288 Find the comprehensive guide to Java interview questions and answers for both freshers and experienced professionals. Here, we have covered the top interview questions on Java that are likely to be asked when you appear for your job interview.  Java has been ruling the world of application development for more than a couple of decades...

The post Top 65 Java Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With Free PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

Find the comprehensive guide to Java interview questions and answers for both freshers and experienced professionals. Here, we have covered the top interview questions on Java that are likely to be asked when you appear for your job interview. 

Java has been ruling the world of application development for more than a couple of decades now. Many new programming languages have hit the market over the years, but Java has still been a dominating language because of its unique features and robust functionalities. 

If you are someone who is looking to kickstart a career as a Java Programmer or Java Developer, or looking to switch your current job as an experienced professional, then knowing what are the top Java interview questions is crucial. It is because there will be several concepts that you need to know and answer well to crack the interview and get that dream job.

To make things easier for you, we have curated everything here in detail. So, this article is for you if you are searching for:

  • Java interview questions and answers for freshers
  • Java interview questions and answers for experienced professionals
  • Java interview questions PDF (Free Download)
  • Advanced Java interview questions for 3-10 years experience.

In addition to this, we have also included some expert tips to prepare for a Java developer interview, the most important programs that can be asked in the interview, and much more. Let’s get started!

Java Interview Questions for Freshers & Beginners

In this section, we have covered some basic Java interview questions and answers for freshers. If you have done a Java course and are looking to begin your career in this field, then ensure to go through these questions below.

1. What is Java? Explain its meaning and definition.

It is one of the most popular programming languages today, with its role in the development of web applications, mobile apps, software, gaming systems, as well as server-side technologies.

Java programming has been here for over 20 years now and has been nothing less than a boon for programmers and developers. Famous as an object-oriented programming language, Java is not only multi-purpose, but also a secure, high-performing, and trusted coding language. This is the reason behind its usage in even enterprise-grade software development. 

Upskill Yourself With Live Training

Full Stack Web Development Course WordPress Course
Front-End Development Course MERN Stack Course

2. The syntax of Java is based on which programming language?

C and C++ programming are the base of the Java syntax. 

3. How is Java platform independent?

Among the list of Java interview questions, you can be asked why Java is called platform independent. You must be ready with the correct answer.

The meaning of platform-independent is that you can write a Java program on one machine and execute it on other machines or platforms. It has become possible because of the bytecode, and VMs can handle this code accordingly. So, there will be no issues related to the hardware when it comes to running the code. 

4. When was Java developed?

Java was developed in the year 1991. 

5. Who developed the Java programming language?

Java was developed by James Gosling. He was a computer scientist based in Canada, and is famous as the founder of Java programming. When he invented Java, he was working at Sun Microsystems, which Oracle later acquired.

6. What does ‘write once run anywhere’ mean in Java? 

Write once, run anywhere, or WORA in Java means that it is a coding language where you write a program for some purpose only once and then use it or run it across multiple operating systems. For instance, you can write a program and run it on Windows, macOS, Android, Linux, etc. 

“Java’s write once, run anywhere” term was first initiated by Sun Microsystems, where the founder of this language used to work. This characteristic makes Java a portable programming language.

Also Read: Top 50+ HTML Interview Questions and Answers

7. What is Java programming used for? Explain its primary applications.

There is a wide range of use cases of Java programming language. Below are its main applications:

a) Mobile App Development

Despite the introduction of Kotlin, Java is still used as a reliable programming language for Android app development. This coding language has the software development kits (SDKs) and libraries that are required to develop mobile apps.

b) Chatbot Development

Another use of Java is in chatbot development. Smart chatbots that use natural language processing (NLP) can be built using this programming language. 

c) Development of Games

One of the most important applications of Java is in building games or gaming apps. Some of the world-famous games like Minecraft, Spiral Knights, SimCity, Saints Row 2, Asphalt 3, FIFA 11, Wakfu, Tokyo City Nights and many more are built on Java. 

d) Cloud Computing

The write once, use anywhere characteristic of Java makes it a highly applicable language for cloud applications as well. Plenty of cloud platforms rely on this programming for a decentralized experience. 

e) Big Data

Big data platforms or tools heavily depend on Java, and it is considered a language on which the future of big data relies. This is because of its features that enable faster processing of large sets of data.

f) Enterprise-grade Web Apps

Enterprise-level apps that are mission-critical are developed using Java programming. Even top brands like Wipro, Google, Infosys, and HCL use it to develop enterprise apps. It is because of its high performance it enables and supports a wide range of server-side technologies. 

Some of the most popular web apps built on Java include LinkedIn, IRCTC, and AliExpress. 

g) Internet of Things (IoT)

In IoT technology, sensors and hardware devices process the data. These things are mostly run using programs written in Java programming language. 

h) Artificial Intelligence (AI)

As one of the most suitable programming languages for artificial intelligence (AI) projects, Java can be used to develop intelligent solutions. For instance, it is great for building search algorithms, neural networks, ML-based services, deep learning applications, etc. 

8. What is Java Virtual Machine (JVM)?

JVM in Java, as the name suggests, is a virtual machine that plays a crucial part in the execution of source code. It works as an abstraction layer between the runtime environment and the hardware. 

9. What is Java Runtime Environment (JRE)?

JRE in Java is simply an environment that allows developers or programmers to run Java-based apps on operating systems. You can say that it facilitates the interaction between OS and the program. 

Java JRE provides several resources to programmers, such as libraries, JVM, Java Plug-in, Web Start, etc. It is available to download on Windows, Linux, macOS, and Oracle Solaris. 

10. What is Java SE (Standard Edition)?

Java Standard Edition, abbreviated as Java SE, is a computing platform on which programmers and developers build and deploy Java-based projects. This platform comes with plenty of Java libraries and APIs, including java.util, java.net, java.math, java.io, and many more. 

11. What are operators in Java?

Java operators are simply the symbols used to perform a wide range of different operations. Every operator has its specific operation or functionality. 

For instance, you can use the + operator for the addition of two values, the operator for subtraction, the * operator for multiplication, and the / operator for division. 

12. What are the different types of Java operators?

You can classify the operators in Java into five categories, as mentioned below:

a) Arithmetic operators

These are used for mathematical calculations, or arithmetic operations, to be precise.

+ Addition
Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
% Modulo

b) Unary operators

These operators play a vital role in performing operations related to increasing or decreasing the values. 

Unary minus (-) To make a value negative
Unary plus (+) Generally not used as values are positive by default
Increment (++) To increase the value by 1
Decrement (–) To decrease the value by 1
Inverting (!) To inverse the value

c) Assignment operators

These operators, as the name suggests, are used to assign values to variables in a Java program.

Operator Presentation Meaning
= X = Y X = Y
+= X += Y X = X + Y
-= X -= Y X = X = Y
*= X *= Y X = X * Y
%= X %= X = X % Y

d) Relational or comparison operators 

If you want to see the relations between values, then the relational operators in Java are used. For instance, you can check whether the given values are equal to each other, greater/lesser than each other, greater than equal to, or lesser than equal to each other.

If the boolean values don’t meet the relational operator criteria, then accordingly, it returns true or false.

Operator Meaning
== Is equal to
!= Is not equal to
> Is greater than
< Is lesser than
>= Is greater than or equal to
<= Is lesser than or equal to

e) Logical operators

The digital electronics field heavily depends on AND and OR gate operations. The same applies in Java for decision-making based on logical AND and OR operators.

Operator Meaning
&& Logical AND
|| Logical OR
! Logical NOT

13. What is JIT compiler in Java?

Java JIT compiler or Just-In-Time compiler is one of the key parts of Java Runtime Environment (JRE). Its role is the compilation of bytecode to native machine code when it’s in runtime. As a result, the overall performance of the Java apps is optimized.

14. What is a Java class?

A class in Java is a template based on some logic using which we can create multiple objects that follow the same logic as the class. The role of a Java class is to define the data types and methods of the objects.

In simple terms, you can call the class the main category, which includes several items called objects. Here, the objects under a class will have similar properties or characteristics.

For example, if you visit Amazon and browse the “Mobiles” category, it will show you smartphones of all brands and types. But all these smartphones will have similar properties like a camera, some RAM, the ability to make calls, download apps, send messages, etc.

So, here, the ‘Mobiles’ is a class, and all the smartphones are objects. 

15. What is a package in Java?

A package in Java is like a folder that holds classes, interfaces, and sub-packages. Here, the point to be noted is that everything in this folder or Java package has some similarity or relation based on their functionality.

The aim of using a Java package is to better organize the workloads, avoid conflicts in names, and control access. 

In Java, there are two types of packages:

  1. Built-in packages
  2. User-defined packages

The built-in packages include java.lang, java.util, java.io, and java.net, which can be used from Java API. Apart from these, you can also build your own packages, which are called user-defined packages. 

Well-Curated Free Quiz Tests to Challenge Your Skills!

16. What are keywords in Java?

Keywords in Java programming are actually some predefined words in syntax that a programmer can’t use in the form of classes, methods, identifiers, or variables. These are also known as reserved words in Java.

17. How many keywords are there in Java?

There are over 50 keywords in Java. Here is the full list in alphabetical order:

  1. abstract
  2. assert
  3. boolean
  4. break
  5. byte
  6. case
  7. catch
  8. char
  9. class
  10. continue
  11. const
  12. default
  13. do
  14. double
  15. else
  16. enum
  17. exports
  18. extends
  19. final
  20. finally
  21. float
  22. for
  23. goto
  24. if
  25. implements
  26. import
  27. instanceof
  28. int
  29. interface
  30. long
  31. module
  32. native
  33. new
  34. package
  35. private
  36. protected
  37. public
  38. requires
  39. return
  40. short
  41. static
  42. strictfp
  43. super
  44. switch
  45. synchronized
  46. this
  47. throw
  48. throws
  49. transient
  50. try
  51. var
  52. void
  53. volatile
  54. while

18. What are the key features of Java?

It is one of the basic Java interview questions for freshers, and sometimes for experienced professionals as well. 

Here are the top 10 features of Java that you must know:

a) Simple, Clean, Easy to Learn

One of the best things about Java is that it is easy to learn and understand, even for beginners. Its syntax is simple as it is based on basic languages like C++. The code written in Java is also clean and easy to run.

b) Object-oriented Programming Language

Java is completely based on objects. Hence it is called an object-oriented programming language. 

c) Java is Both Compiled and Interpreted

A programming language is generally compiled, or it is interpreted. Only rare languages exhibit both things. Java is one such coding language that has the features of both compilation and interpretation. 

d) Java is Platform Independent

This is one of the top features of Java programming. The meaning of platform-independent here is that you can write a Java program on one machine and execute it on other machines or platforms. It has become possible because of the BYTE code. 

e) Portability

The portability in Java is the result of having features like platform independence and architecture neutrality. Programmers can run Java code on a wide range of virtual machines and hardware because its bytecode can be converted accordingly. 

f) Robust Programming Language

The abilities of Java, like garbage collection and exception handling, make it a solid programming language. 

g) Highly Secure

Security plays a crucial part whether you are developing a basic app or a business-critical solution. On that front, Java is considered as the most secure language as it helps in writing code that is free from viruses and other security threats. That is the reason behind its application in enterprise-grade app development. 

h) Java Multithreading Features

The multithreading feature helps in writing code that can perform multiple tasks simultaneously. Moreover, the thread tasks consume less processing power and memory. 

i) Easy Interpretation

Regardless of the computer architecture, Java programs can be run and interpreted on any type of machine. You can call it architecture-neutral language. 

j) High Performance

Instead of being an interpreted language, Java offers faster performance because of its just-in-time compiler.

19. What is object in Java?

As you might already know that Java is all about classes and objects. But what is an object? This is a crucial topic that you should include in your list of Java interview questions and answers for freshers. Let’s know its meaning below.

An object is an instance of a class in Java. In fact, it is created from a class only using the ‘new’ keyword. Every object has its identity, behavior, and state, the way things in the real world also have these three things. 

20. What is difference between Java and JavaScript?

There are several differences between Java and JavaScript. Whether you are a fresher or an experienced professional, this is among the top Java interview questions for you. Below, we have curated a tabular comparison of Java vs JavaScript so that it becomes easier for you to understand the main differences.

Java JavaScript
Object-oriented programming language Object-based scripting language
Can be used for complicated tasks and processes Can’t be used for complicated tasks
Needs code compilation Text-based code
Independent language Needs to be used with HTML
Strongly typed programming language. Need to declare variables before using them in the program. Loosely typed language. No issues whether data types are declared or not
It’s statically-type It’s dynamically-typed
High memory consumption Low memory consumption
Saved as byte code Saved as source code
For concurrency, it uses threads For concurrency, it uses events
.java extension used to save programs .js extension used to save programs
Supports multithreading Doesn’t support multithreading
Objects are based on class Objects are based on prototype
Need JDK or Java Development Kit to run the code Need text editor to run the code
Primarily used for backend development Can use for both front-end and back-end

21. Which Java class is considered a superclass of all other classes?

The object class is considered the superclass of all the remaining classes. 

22. Is it possible for a class to extend itself?

No. It’s not possible. 

23. What is difference between Java and C++ programming?

Another important Java interview questions for freshers and experienced developers can be about the differences between Java and C++ programming languages. To help you understand it easily, we have created the following comparison between the both:

Java C++
Platform independent Platform dependent
Uses compiler and interpreter both Compiler only
Garbage controller to automate memory management Manual memory management
Support for comments Doesn’t support comments
Doesn’t support goto statement Supports goto statement
Developed by James Gosling Developed by Bjarne Stroustrup
Used for various types of development purposes, like web apps, Windows apps, etc. System programming is the primary use.
Supports procedural and object-oriented programming both Supports object-oriented programming only
Limited number of libraries  Large number of libraries
Write once, run anywhere  Write once, compile anywhere

24. Explain the difference between JDK, JRE, and JRM.

Java interview questions about the difference between Java JDK, JRE, and JRM are very common. Here is the tabular comparison to help you find the right answer.

JDK JRE JVM
Java Development Kit Java Runtime Environment Java Virtual Machine
An SDK required to build Java-based apps. It comes with several tools like debugger, compiler, and more. A software package that comes with class libraries. Used for running Java projects. A virtual machine that makes Java a platform-independent language.
Platform-dependent. Platform-dependent. Platform-independent.
Mostly used in code execution during development. Used for providing an environment where the code execution can be done. Used to define the execution and supporting JRE.
JDK = JRE + Development Tools JRE = JVM + Libraries JVM = Support JRE to load, verify, and execute code
Comes with various tools related to debugging, monitoring, and overall development. Comes with class libraries and supporting files. Doesn’t include any tools or a library.

25. Is it possible to assign a superclass to a subclass in Java?

Not. It’s not possible.

26. How to print text in Java?

The printIn() and print() methods are used to print text in Java.

a) printIn() example

public class Main {

  public static void main(String[] args) {

    System.out.println("Hi There!");

System.out.println("Welcome to WsCube Tech!");

System.out.println("Let’s know top Java Interview Questions and Answers!");

  }

}

Output:

Hi There!

Welcome to WsCube Tech!

Let’s know the top Java Interview Questions and Answers!

b) print() example

public class Main {

  public static void main(String[] args) {

    System.out.print("Hi There! ");

System.out.print("I can now learn the core interview questions on Java.");

  }

}

Output:

Hi There! I can now learn the core interview questions on Java.

Intermediate Java Interview Questions for Experienced (2-5 Years)

In case you have been doing your job for quite some time now and now looking to switch to a better opportunity, then here are the most asked core Java interview questions and answers for experienced developers or programmers. These are applicable to your profile if your experience ranges between 2 to 5 years. 

27. What is multithreading in Java?

When a Java program is divided into multiple small parts, and these parts are executed parallelly and run simultaneously, this process is called multithreading. 

The role of Java multithreading is to create lightweight programs or threads so that processing power can be used in an optimum manner. 

28. Which class is used for multithreading in Java?

The Java Thread class is used to execute multithreading. It enables the creation of small threads which can run in a concurrent manner. 

Suggested Reading: 50+ Most Asked ReactJS Interview Questions and Answers

29. What is Java applet?

An applet in Java is used for setting up dynamic content on a web page. You can call it a program that is added to the page, which then runs in a browser and shows the dynamic content to the end user.

Some of the primary benefits of a Java applet include lower response time at the front end, secure code, and the applet program working great on popular operating systems, like Windows, Linux, and macOS.

30. What is garbage collection in Java?

It is an important concept that you must know while appearing for the interview. This is one of the most asked Java garbage collection interview questions. 

The meaning of garbage collection in Java programming is that it automates the memory management for programs running on the Java virtual machine.

So, when you create and run programs, heaps of memory are allocated for memory consumption. In the long run, there will be several objects of the Java program that won’t be required. What the garbage collection does is remove the unused objects automatically. As a result, it optimizes memory.

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

DBMS Interview Questions Power BI Interview Questions
Java Interview Questions JavaScript Interview Questions
CSS Interview Questions Flutter Interview Questions
HTML Interview Questions NodeJS Interview Questions
MySQL Interview Questions ReactJS Interview Questions
Python Interview Questions C Programming Interview Questions
OOPS Interview Questions Data Structure Interview Questions

31. What if you use Java keywords as a variable or identifier?

In case a program contains keywords as a variable, class, etc., then it will show a compile-time error. 

32. What is inheritance in Java?

If you have been searching for Java OOPS interview questions and answers, then this is going to be a top question. It is because inheritance is a crucial concept in Java related to object-oriented programming (OOP).

In simple terms, Java inheritance means creating classes that inherit features of some other classes. So, if you want to build a class that has some relationship with any other classes, then you need to use the inheritance method. 

As a result, the new class that you create will have the features of the inherited class. It is a good mechanism to use to set up a hierarchy between classes.

33. What is polymorphism in Java?

This is yet another important concept in the list of top Java interview questions and answers related to OOPS.

The general meaning of polymorphism is “the condition of occurring in several different forms.” So, polymorphism in Java can be defined as the ability of a class to take different forms or to provide different functionalities.

For example, you can use this method to show a single message in multiple forms, based on the set parameters.

34. What is encapsulation in Java?

If you have been in the field of programming for some time now, then one of the core Java interview questions for 3 years experience will be about encapsulation. Let’s understand its meaning here.

Java encapsulation is a process that allows you to integrate the data variables and code and store them as a single thing. It is like two different capsules of medicine are mixed together to create a new single capsule. This is the logic behind calling it encapsulation. 

An important thing to know here is that after the encapsulation of variables of a class, It won’t be possible for other classes to access these variables. 

35. What is serialization in Java?

Java interview questions related to serialization are so common to be asked when you appear for a job interview. 

When there is a need for transferring an object code in Java from one JVM to another, then the serialization process is used. Here, what it does is convert the object code to a stream so that it can be transferred to another JVM over the internet or network. 

Once the stream is received on another JVM, it then goes through the deserialization process so that it can be converted back to the object code and brought into use.

36. What is Java JDBC?

JDBC stands for Java Database Connectivity.

It is an API to establish and manage a connection to the database right from within the Java program. Using JDBC, the developers or programmers can connect to not only one but multiple databases. 

You can say that it works like a communication channel between the program and the database. Developers can use it to connect to any database if the relevant drivers are in use. 

Since it is not a basic topic, it is an important concept for people looking for core Java interview questions for experienced. 

37. What is Java enum?

Enum in Java stands for enumeration. It is a data type that comes with a set of pre-defined constant values. These values are separated by a comma. The enum concept was brought to this programming as part of Java 5. For declaring the enums, the enum keyword is used.

38. What is constructor overloading in Java?

Another concept to keep in your list of Java interview questions and answers for experienced developers is constructor overloading.

The role of Java constructors is to define the state of an object. When there are various constructors of a single class to be defined, it is called constructor overloading. As a result, a class becomes capable of possessing multiple constructors. 

39. What is copy constructor in Java?

It is a constructor that is used when you need to make a copy of an object of an existing object of the same class. Here, the new copy of the object wouldn’t impact the existing object.

40. Which keyword in Java is used to inherit a class?

We should use the extends keyword for this purpose.

41. What are the top benefits of inheritance in Java?

The following are the main benefits of Java inheritance:

  • Code reusability
  • Method overriding
  • Ability to achieve runtime polymorphism
  • Optimize duplicate code
  • Improve the redundancy of the app
  • Code flexibility so that it can be changed easily

42. What are the different memory areas assigned by JVM?

There are five types of memory areas that a JVM can allocate:

  • Class(Method) Area
  • Heap memory
  • Stack memory
  • Program Counter Register
  • Native Method Stack

43. What are access modifiers in Java?

As a programming enthusiast, you should know about the access modifiers while preparing for the Java interview questions and answers. 

As the name suggests, the access modifiers in Java are used to manage the access level for classes, variables, methods, constructors, etc. The access can be changed or specified using these access modifiers.

Access modifiers are of four types:

  • Public
  • Private
  • Default
  • Protected 

44. How many types of inheritance are there in Java?

There are five types of Java inheritance:

  • Single-level inheritance
  • Multi-level Inheritance
  • Hierarchical Inheritance
  • Multiple Inheritance
  • Hybrid Inheritance

45. Can you restrict an object from inheriting its subclass? If yes, how?

Yes. It is possible if we declare the member or object private. In such a case, the subclass can’t access the private members directly. 

46. How can we remove the duplicate elements from a list of numbers if Java 8 is being used?

First, we need to apply the stream, so those duplicate elements will be found, and then make a new collection by applying the Collections.toSet() method.

Book Free Class of Online Full-Stack Web Development Course to Build a Great Career!

Advanced Java Interview Questions and Answers for Experienced (5-10 Years)

Now comes the turn for professionals looking for top Java interview questions for 5 years experience and more. Here, the questions are relevant if your experience level ranges between 5-10 years. 

47. What is the difference between heap memory and stack memory in Java?

Two types of memory are used in the Java Virtual Machine (JVM). One is heap memory, and another is stack memory. 

The primary difference between the two is that heap memory’s role is to store objects, whereas stack memory stores local variables and the order of method execution. The following tabular comparison shows all the key differences between the both. While preparing for Java interview questions and answers, ensure to understand this concept well.

Heap Memory Stack Memory
Used to save JRE classes and objects Used to save methods, variables, and reference variables
Memory size is larger Memory size is small
It takes more time to access or allocate heap memory It takes less time to access or allocate stack memory
No fixed format or order  LIFO (Last In First Out) order
Allows changes to the allocated memory Doesn’t allow changes to the allocated memory
-Xmx and -Xms are used to increase/decrease memory size -Xss is used to increase memory size
Memory allocation or deallocation is done manually Memory allocation or deallocation is done using compiler
Shared memory for all threads Dedicated memory for every object
Higher cost Lower cost

48. Which are the best Java compilers?

If you are an experienced developer, then you must know about the top Java compilers. Because this is going to be one of the top interview questions on Java for experienced professionals.

Here is the list of best compilers for Java programming:

  • Eclipse
  • NetBeans
  • Xcode
  • AndroidStudio
  • Tabnine
  • Codota
  • Codenvy
  • JDeveloper
  • jGrasp
  • IntelliJ IDEA
  • BlueJ
  • MyEclipse
  • Slickedit
  • JBoss Forge
  • JEdit

49. What is the difference between equals() method and equality (==) operator in Java?

There are a number of key differences between the equals method and the equality operator in Java. The primary difference is that one is a method, and another is an operator.

Such tricky concepts are usually asked when you have some experience in this field. So, you need to study the core Java interview questions and answers for experienced professionals really well.

For this question, we have created a tabular comparison to help you understand the differences between the equals method and equality operator in Java.

Equals() Method Equality Operator (==)
It is a method It is an operator
Its role is for comparing the content of an object Its role is for comparing the reference values and objects
It can be overridden Can’t be overridden
Can’t be used with primitives Can be used with primitives

50. Can you inherit static members to a subclass?

No. It can’t be done. 

51. Can you override the final method in Java?

No. It can’t be overridden.

52. How to declare an infinite loop in Java?

You must be well-prepared for such Java programming interview questions. There are three ways to declare an infinite loop in Java.

a) While loop

Syntax

while(condition){

//code

}

b) For Loop

Syntax

for(initialization;condition;updation){

//code

}

c) Do-While Loop

Syntax

do{

//code

}while(condition);

53. What are the roles of final, finally, and finalize keywords in Java?

There are 50+ keywords in Java, and three similar-sounding keywords from them are final, finally, and finalize. Let’s understand the differences between them with the following comparison. You must know it because it can be one of those core Java interview questions for experienced.

final finally finalize
Its role is to execute limitations or restrictions on classes, methods, or variables Its role is in exception handling. finally keyword runs the crucial code no matter whether the exception occurs or not. Used for processing clean up during garbage collection.
Can be applied to classes, methods, and variables Can be applied to exception handling cases Can be applied to objects
After declaring the final keyword, it can’t be updated.  Whether an exception occurs or it does not, the finally keyword will run the crucial code. The cleaning of objects during garbage collection is done using the finalize keyword.
This keyword is applied only when it is called. It gets applied once the execution of the try-catch block is done. It applies at the time of object cleaning.

54. When to use the super keyword in Java?

The role of the super keyword in Java is to refer to the adjacent parent class object. It is generally used with variables, methods, and constructors. In addition to being a reference keyword for parent class objects, it can also be used to trigger the parent class methods and constructors. 

55. What is a ClassLoader in Java?

A Java ClassLoader is used to load the classes in JRE in a dynamic manner. It is an important component in the Runtime Environment that loads the class into the memory part of the JRE.

It is because of ClassLoaders that the JRE doesn’t have to have information about the files loaded to it. 

56. What are the different types of ClassLoaders in Java?

There are three ClassLoader types in Java, as defined below:

a) Bootstrap ClassLoader

Used for loading the important classes and internal classes of Java Development Kit (JDK). This ClassLoader runs only when it is called by the Java Virtual Machine (JVM). 

b) Extension ClassLoader

Used for loading classes from the extensions directory of the JDK. It is a child of the BootStrap ClassLoader.

c) System ClassLoader

Also called Application ClassLoader, it is used for loading the classes from the environment variable CLASSPATH. It is a child of the Extension ClassLoader. 

57. Is it possible to access the members of a subclass if you create a superclass’ object?

No. It is not possible to access the subclass members. Only superclass members will be accessible. 

58. How to define a functional interface in Java?

We can use the @Functionalinterface annotation in the Java 8 to define a functional interface.

59. How Lambda expressions and functional interface are interrelated?

We can call the functional interface a large platform that comes with numerous expressions. The lambda expressions are one such part of this interface. This is the interrelation between the two.

60. What methods are used in Java 8 to define a number in functional interface?

Generally, the static method and default method are used when a number is defined in a functional interface.

61. What are the things to know and guidelines related to functional interface in Java 8?

Programmers need to follow these guidelines:

  • Only a single method should be used to define the interface
  • You can’t define multiple abstracts
  • Utilize @Functionalinterface annotation in order to define a functional interface
  • To define a number, you can use whatever method you want to
  • In case you override the method of java.lang.object class, it won’t be counted as an abstract method.

Suggested Reading: 50+ Most Asked ReactJS Interview Questions and Answers

62. What are the different types of functional interfaces in Java 8?

These are the main types of functional interface:

  • Consumer
  • Predicate
  • Supplier
  • Function (UnaryOperator and BinaryOperator)

63. State the biggest difference between Map and FlatMap.

The primary difference between the two is that Map wraps the return value in the ordinal type, whereas FlatMap doesn’t do it.

64. What is the primary benefit for which one should use Metaspace over PermGen?

There is one big reason to go for Metaspace instead of PermGen. This reason is that the size of PermGen is fixed. As a result, it can’t increase in a dynamic manner. On the other hand, the Metaspace does not have any limitations in terms of size. Its size can increase dynamically. 

65. What is the difference between composition and aggregation in Java?

Both composition and aggregation are associations in Java. The former is considered a strong association, while the latter is considered a weak association. Let’s understand the differences between them with the below tabular comparison:

Aggregation Composition
Weak  Strong
There is a relationship between classes A class belongs to another class
Interrelated classes can be independent Classes are dependent on each other.
As the classes can be independent, it is great for reusing the code As the classes are not independent, code reusability becomes difficult 

List of Java 8 Interview Questions

Java 8 is among the newest versions of this programming language. The Java 8 interview questions can be asked to a candidate with any experience level. Undoubtedly, the level of questions will be according to your experience range.

Here are some of the most common interview questions on Java 8:

  1. What are the new features in Java SE 8?
  2. What are some of the main benefits of using Java 8?
  3. Define optional class.
  4. What is a functional interface in Java 8?
  5. Define MetaSpace.
  6. What is the meaning of the String::ValueOf expression?
  7. Explain the concept of streams in Java 8.
  8. What is Nashorn in Java 8?
  9. How is MetaSpace different from PermGen?
  10. What do you mean by method reference?
  11. Explain intermediate and terminal operations.
  12. Which are the most used terminal operations?
  13. Is it possible for a functional interface to inherit another interface?
  14. What is the difference between findFirst() and findAny()?
  15. Which are the key components of a Java stream?
  16. Which functional interfaces come pre-defined in Java 8?
  17. What does type interface mean?
  18. State the syntax of a lambda expression.
  19. What is the difference between collection and stream?
  20. Explain the role of JJS in Java 8.

Find Java 8 interview questions and answers by clicking on the linked write-up.

Java Interview Questions and Answers PDF (Free Download)

You can now also download our free Java programming interview questions and answers PDF. While going for the job interview, keep it handy on your smartphone or laptop so that you can revise things hassle-free. 

Java Interview Questions FAQs

1. What is Java interview questions?

The Java interview questions mean the concepts or things that are very likely to be asked to a candidate when he/she goes for the job interview. These are appropriate for candidates applying for jobs as: 

a) Java Developer 
b) Java Programmer
c) Senior Java Developer
d) Java Web Developer
e) Java Android Developer
f) Java EE Developer
g) Java Engineer
h) Java Technical Lead

2. Can you share some Java OOPS interview questions?

Following OOPS concepts in Java interview questions can be asked to you:

a) What is the meaning of OOPS in programming?
b) What is the role of OOPS in Java?
c) What are the primary features of OOPS?
d) What are the pros and cons of OOPS?
e) What is encapsulation?
f) What is polymorphism?
g) What is abstraction?
h) Is Java a pure object-oriented programming language? If not, why?
i) What is the difference between a class and an object?
j) What are manipulators?
k) What is the difference between constructor and method?
l) What is a destructor?
m) What are the different types of inheritance?
n) What is the difference between OOP and procedural programming?
o) Explain the difference between error and exception.
p) Which are the most popular object-oriented programming languages?
q) What is the difference between runtime polymorphism and compile-time polymorphism?
r) Is it mandatory that objects will always be created from a class?
s) What is a subclass?
t) What is a superclass?
u) What is static polymorphism?
v) What is dynamic polymorphism?
w) What is the difference between overriding and overloading?
x) What is garbage collection?

3. What are the top Java spring boot interview questions?

Here is the list of questions related to spring boot:

a) What is spring boot in Java?
b) Why use spring boot? What are its benefits?
c) Which are the main components of spring boot?
d) What is spring initializer?
e) Explain the differences between @Controller and @RestController.
f) What do you understand by dependency injection?
g) How to define properties in spring boot?
h) What do you mean by starter dependency?
i) What is the role of @SpringBootApplication?
j) Why do you use @ComponentScan?
k) Explain start dependencies.
l) Explain the differences between GetMapping and RequestMapping.
m) What do you mean by Spring Boot CLI?
n) Tell me about some of the most used CLI commands.

4. What are the most asked Java microservices interview questions?

Here is the list of questions related to microservices that can be asked in your Java interview:

a) What do you understand by microservices architecture?
b) Which are the top microservices tools?
c) Why do we use microservices?
d) What is the role of reports and dashboards in microservices?
e) Explain the difference between monolithic architecture and microservices.
f) What is monolithic architecture?
g) Tell about the key features of microservices.
h) What is cohesion?
i) What do you understand by coupling?
j) What is the meaning of domain-driven design?
k) What is bounded context?
l) Explain which tests are used in microservices.
m) Why is PACT used in microservices?

5. What are some Java interview questions for Selenium Tester?

As a Selenium Automation Tester, you can expect the following interview questions on Java:

a) What is data hiding in Java?
b) Explain the concept of encapsulation.
c) What do you understand by a tightly encapsulated class?
d) Tell me about the getter and setter methods in Java.
e) What does the Is-A relationship mean in Java?
f) Explain the limitations of Java in Selenium testing.
g) What is Java method overloading?
h) Tell me about the same-origin policy and the way of handling it.
i) How to implement inheritance in Java?
j) Does Java support multiple inheritances using class? If not, why?
k) Can you make use of super() and this() in a single constructor?

6. Which are the top Java concurrency interview questions?

The interviewer may ask you the following concurrency questions in Java:

a) What is concurrency?
b) What do you mean by the executors framework?
c) Explain the atomic operation.
d) Explain the lifecycle of a thread.
e) How to set up the environment for Java concurrency?
f) What is an atomic operation in Java?
g) Which atomic classes are used in the API of Java concurrency?
h) What is an executor class?
i) Explain the concept of lock interface in concurrency API.
j) What is BlockingQueue in Java concurrency?
k) What do you understand by FutureTask class?

7. What are the frequently asked Java collections interview questions?

Here is the list of interview questions on the Java collections concept:

a) What is Java collection?
b) Explain the differences between collection and array in Java?
c) Explain the difference between ArrayList and LinkedList?
d) What is the difference between enumeration and iterator in Java?
e) Tell me about the collection framework hierarchy?
f) What is a priority queue?
g) Explain the differences between HashSet and TreeSet in Java?
h) State the differences between HashSet and HashMap?
i) Is it possible to add a null element to HashSet?
j) What are fail-fast and fail-safe iterators?
k) Explain the differences between ListIterator and Iterator?

8. Which are the primary Java thread interview questions?

Below is the list of common questions related to threading and multithreading in Java programming:

a) Explain the concept of multithreading in Java?
b) What benefits does multithreading offer?
c) What are the different states of a thread lifecycle?
d) How to create a Java thread?
e) How to implement a thread in Java?
f) Tell about the concept of thread priority.
g) How do the threads in Java interact with each other?
h) Explain ThreadLocal in Java.
i) What are some ways to get thread safety?
j) What is the reason behind a sleep() thread being static?
k) What is a daemon thread, and how to create it?
l) What is deadlock?
m) Explain the concept of a thread pool and how can we create a thread pool.

9. Which are the top Java string interview questions?

Following is the list of interview questions on Java string concept:

a) Define the string in Java?
b) What are the ways for string declaration in Java?
c) What is the role of the string intern() method?
d) Explain the differences between String and StringBuffer?
e) When saving passwords in Java, developers choose a character array over a string. Why do they do so?
f) What are the reasons behind string being immutable?
g) State the differences between StringBuilder and StringBuffer in Java.
h) How can you compare two strings in Java?
i) Explain the role of the substring() method in Java?
j) Can you check whether a string is empty or not? If yes, how?
k) What are the ways for converting a string to a byte array?
l) How to find the longest palindrome in a Java string?
m) What is a string pool in Java?

10. What are the most asked Java inheritance interview questions?

Recruiters or interviewers often ask these questions related to inheritance in Java:

a) Explain Java inheritance.
b) What is the purpose of using inheritance?
c) Define the Is-A relationship in Java?
d) How to implement inheritance in Java?
e) How to create the subclass of a class?
f) What are the main benefits of inheritance?
g) State the difference between inheritance and multi-level inheritance?
h) Explain hybrid inheritance.
i) What are the different types of inheritance?
j) Does Java support multi-inheritance through class? If not, why?

11. What are the top Java 8 interview questions for 10 years experience?

These tough Java 8 interview questions can be asked to an experienced candidate:

a) What is new in Java 8 compared to previous versions?
b) What is a functional interface in Java 8?
c) Explain the differences between a functional interface and a SAM interface.
d) How to define a functional interface?
e) What guidelines need to be followed for the functional interface?
f) How to define a number in a functional interface?
g) How are lambda expressions and functional interfaces interrelated?
h) What are the main types of functional interfaces in Java 8?
i) State the differences between Map and FlatMap.
j) What are the benefits of using Metaspace compared to PerGen?

12. What are the Java technical lead interview questions?

In case you are applying for the role of Java Technical Lead, then expect some tricky and technical Java interview questions, as mentioned below:

a) Can you debug a Java program while it’s running? How?
b) What is an asynchronous event?
c) Which tools are best to use for testing Java code?
d) Which tools are the best to probe Java memory leaks?
e) Explain the decorator design pattern in Java.
f) What are the key Java 8 features that can make the lives of programmers easier?
g) What is the role of LDAP servers?
h) Have you developed enterprise software or applications using Java? Share the name and your experience with it.
i) What is an LDAP server and its uses?
j) Explain the Spring MVC flow.
k) What are RESTful web services in Java?
l) What are some good ways to avoid a database deadlock?
m) Explain the concepts of Spring security authentication and authorization.
n) What is digest authentication in Spring security?
o) What is SecurityContext in Spring security?
p) State the use of AbstractSecurityInterceptor in spring security.
q) What is a sequence in Oracle, and how to execute it?
r) What is a 2-way SSL, and why is it required?
s) How to implement 2-way SSL using spring boot?
t) Explain the design patterns in microservices architecture.

13. What are the most asked Java interview questions for 2 years experience?

For developers or programmers working for a couple of years now, below are the top Java interview questions for 2 years experience:

a) Is it possible to override a static method? If yes, how?
b) Which Java class is considered the base class?
c) State the difference between HashMap and HashSet.
d) Why Java strings are immutable?
e) What is a ClassPath in Java?
f) Explain the differences between StringBuffer and StringBuilder.
g) What is Java multithreading?
h) What is an applet in Java?
i) Explain garbage collection in Java.
j) What is inheritance in Java?
k) What is polymorphism in Java?
l) Explain Java serialization.
m) When should we use the transient variable?
n) Is it possible to call the start method twice? If yes, how?
o) How to make a class immutable in Java?
p) What is a Java copy constructor?
q) How the sorting of custom objects is done in Java?
r) Explain the marker interface in Java.
s) Explain the differences between LinkedList and ArrayList.
t) What is the difference between a Checked Exception and an Unchecked exception?

14. What are some of the most important core Java topics for an interview?

You must not skip these important topics before going for the interview:

a) Java collections
b) Exception handling
c) Design patterns
d) Spring
e) Java 8 stream
f) Spring boot
g) Microservices
h) Concurrency
i) OOPS
j) Collections
k) Multithreading
l) Inheritance

The post Top 65 Java Interview Questions and Answers in 2025 (With Free PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
Top 51 WordPress Interview Questions and Answers (2025) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/wordpress-interview-questions-answers/ Tue, 31 Oct 2023 14:03:48 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=4168 In today’s digital age, WordPress has established itself as the go-to platform for building websites and managing online content. With over 40% of the web powered by WordPress, it’s no surprise that the demand for skilled WordPress professionals is on the rise.  Whether you’re a seasoned developer or someone looking to enter web development, a...

The post Top 51 WordPress Interview Questions and Answers (2025) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

In today’s digital age, WordPress has established itself as the go-to platform for building websites and managing online content. With over 40% of the web powered by WordPress, it’s no surprise that the demand for skilled WordPress professionals is on the rise. 

Whether you’re a seasoned developer or someone looking to enter web development, a deep understanding of WordPress is a valuable asset. To help you prepare for a WordPress-related job interview or simply to expand your knowledge, we’ve put together a comprehensive list of WordPress interview questions and answers. 

In this blog post, we’ll cover a range of topics, from the basics of WordPress to more advanced techniques, ensuring that you’re well-prepared to showcase your expertise and make a lasting impression during your next WordPress interview. 

1. What is WordPress?

WordPress is a popular and versatile content management system (CMS) that is used to create and manage websites and blogs. It is an open-source platform, which means that it is free to use and can be modified and extended by a vast community of developers and users worldwide. 

WordPress provides an intuitive and user-friendly interface, making it accessible to both beginners and experienced users. You don’t need to be a web development expert to create and manage content with WordPress.

This CMS allows you to create, edit, and organize various types of content, including text, images, videos, and more. It uses a “WYSIWYG” (What You See Is What You Get) editor that simplifies the content creation process.

You can choose from a wide range of themes or templates to change the design and layout of your website. There are thousands of free and premium themes available, allowing you to customize your site’s appearance.

Upskill Yourself With Live Training

Full Stack Web Development Course WordPress Course
Front-End Development Course MERN Stack Course

2. What are the key features of WordPress?

WordPress offers a wide range of features that make it a popular choice for creating and managing websites:

User-Friendly Interface: 

WordPress offers an intuitive and easy-to-use interface, allowing users to create, edit, and publish content without the need for advanced technical skills.

Themes: 

You can choose from thousands of free and premium themes to change the design and layout of your website. Themes provide a quick way to give your site a unique look.

Plugins: 

The vast library of plugins allows you to add functionality to your website. Whether you need SEO optimization, e-commerce capabilities, social media integration, or custom forms, there’s likely a plugin available to meet your needs.

Content Management: 

WordPress is built for content management. You can create and organize various types of content, including text, images, videos, and more. It provides a user-friendly content editor.

Blogging: 

WordPress’s roots are in blogging, and it continues to excel in this area. It offers features for managing posts, categories, tags, and comments, making it an ideal platform for bloggers.

SEO-Friendly: 

WordPress has an architecture that’s inherently friendly to search engines. Additionally, there are many SEO plugins available to further optimize your website for search engines.

Media Management: 

You can easily upload, manage, and insert images and other media into your content. WordPress provides media libraries for efficient organization.

User Management: 

WordPress supports multiple user roles and permissions, allowing you to control who can access and modify content on your site. This is particularly useful for multi-author blogs or websites with a team of contributors.

Mobile Responsiveness: 

Many WordPress themes are designed to be responsive, ensuring that your website looks and functions well on various devices, including smartphones and tablets.

E-commerce: 

With plugins like WooCommerce, WordPress can transform into a powerful e-commerce platform, enabling you to sell products and services online.

Scalability: 

WordPress is highly scalable and can be used for everything from personal blogs to large corporate websites, handling varying levels of traffic and content.

Multilingual Support: 

WordPress is available in numerous languages, and you can create multilingual websites using translation plugins and themes.

Open Source: 

WordPress is open-source software, which means the source code is freely available for anyone to view, modify, and distribute. This openness has contributed to its widespread adoption and the development of a vast ecosystem of themes and plugins.

3. Mention the system requirements to install WordPress.

To install WordPress, you’ll need to ensure that your web hosting environment meets the following requirements:

Web Hosting: 

You’ll need a web hosting account or server to host your WordPress website. There are many web hosting providers to choose from, ranging from shared hosting to virtual private servers (VPS) and dedicated servers. Make sure your hosting provider meets these requirements.

Domain Name: 

You’ll need a domain name (e.g., www.yourwebsite.com) to serve as the address for your WordPress site. You can register a domain through a domain registrar or often purchase one through your hosting provider.

Server Requirements:

PHP: WordPress requires PHP to run. Ensure that your hosting environment supports PHP, and it’s recommended to use PHP 7.3 or higher for better performance and security.

MySQL or MariaDB: WordPress uses a database to store its content. Your hosting environment should support either MySQL or MariaDB databases. Check that your hosting provider offers this support.

Web Server: WordPress can run on various web servers, with Apache and Nginx being the most common choices. Make sure your hosting environment uses a compatible web server.

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Certificate: 

It’s highly recommended to use an SSL certificate to secure your website with HTTPS, which not only enhances security but also improves search engine ranking and user trust.

FTP Access: 

While not mandatory, having FTP (File Transfer Protocol) access can be helpful for uploading files and troubleshooting. Many hosting providers offer FTP access.

Email Address: 

You’ll need an email address to complete the WordPress installation process and receive notifications. Ensure that the email address you provide is valid.

Browser: 

You should have a modern web browser, such as Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, or Safari, for accessing the WordPress admin dashboard.

4. Mention the steps to follow to install WordPress.

  • Download WordPress from www.wordpress.org
  • Extract the downloaded files. Upload them on the web server or local host.
  • Open the web browser and navigate to the WordPress file path, where you can see the WordPress installer’s first screen.
  • Select your preferred language.
  • Later, you will see the information required for the database before installing WordPress.
  • Enter the details of the MySQL database.
  • WordPress checks the details you provide and gives a confirmation screen.
  • Next, enter the administration details.
  • After entering the administration details, click the Install WordPress button
  • After installation, you get a screen stating success with the username and the password on this screen.
  • Enter the username and password on the next screen and click login.

 5. Differentiate between WordPress.com and WordPress.org.

WordPress.com is a hosting platform. Here, you can create a website without needing separate hosting. WordPress.org provides free WordPress software to download and install on your web hosting.

6. Explain WordPress Plugins. What are the requirements to run it?

WordPress plugins are extensions or add-ons that enhance the functionality of a WordPress website. They are packages of code that can be easily installed and activated within the WordPress CMS.

The requirements to run WordPress include a web server such as Apache or Nginx, MySQL, PHP, or MariaDB, and a domain name.

7. List a few plugins that come in WordPress.

  • Yoast SEO
  • Wordfence Security
  • Akismet
  • Contact Form 7
  • Google Analytics for WordPress
  • Jetpack
  • Elementor
  • WPForms
  • WooCommerce
  • All-in-One SEO Pack

8. Mention the rules to follow for WordPress plugin development.

  • Create a unique name
  • Create the folder of plugins
  • Create a sub-folder for PHP files, assets, and translations
  • Create the main plug-in file. Fill in the header information
  • Create activation and de-activation functions
  • Create an uninstall script
  • Create a readme.txt file
  • To detect paths to plugin files, use proper constants and functions

9. Explain the components visible on the Home screen of WordPress.

  • Dashboard menu: This component of the home screen offers navigation menu options for posts, media library, pages, and comments on the screen’s left side.
  • Screen options: This home screen component displays different widgets that can be shown or hidden on some screens. Also, this component contains the checkboxes to show or hide other screen options and allows section customization on the admin screen.
  • Welcome: This home page component customizes the WordPress theme by clicking the customize your site button. Also, the center column provides some useful links, such as creating a page, viewing the front end of your web page, and creating a blog post. Additionally, the last column contains links to the menus, widgets, and settings related to comments.
  • Quick Draft: This component includes a mini post editor to write, save, and publish the post from the admin dashboard. This consists of the draft’s title, a few notes, and save it.
  • WordPress news: This home screen’s component displays the recent news about the latest WordPress software updates.
  • Activity: This shows the latest comments and recent posts published. It allows you to reply, edit, delete, approve, or disapprove the comments. Also, you can move comments to spam.
  • At a Glance: This displays an overview of your blog’s posts, the number of published posts and pages, and the number of comments.

10. Is it possible to SEO a WordPress website to show it on Google’s first page?

WordPress has an inbuilt SEO search engine. Also, you can have an extra plug-in in WordPress to help with SEO. This is to rank on a search engine like Google.

11. Explain hooks and their types in WordPress.

Hooks allows users to create WordPress themes or plug-ins with shortcodes without altering the original files.

Two types of hooks are:

Action hooks: Facilitate you to insert an extra code from an outside resource.

Filter hooks: Facilitate you to add text or content at the end of the post.

12. Why does WordPress use MySQL?

Below are a few of the reasons to use MySQL with WordPress:

  • It’s an open source
  • It is swift
  • A widely available database server
  • Supported by low-cost Linux hosting

13. How many tables are present in WordPress by default?

There are about 11 tables in WordPress.

To determine the table number in a vanilla version of the latest WordPress installation, check phpMyAdmin.

wp_ is the prefix for WordPress tables by default.

  • wp_commentmeta
  • wp_comments
  • wp_options
  • wp_postmeta
  • wp_links
  • wp_posts
  • wp_terms
  • wp_term_taxonomy
  • wp_term_relationships
  • wp_usermeta
  • wp_users

14. Can the WordPress folder be renamed?

Yes, you can rename the WordPress folder.  If WordPress is installed, login to the weblog as the administrator and change the settings.

WordPress address (URI):

Blog address (URI):

After the changes, you can rename the folder or directory with the WordPress file.

15. Mention the steps to take if your WordPress file is hacked.

  • Install security plugins like WP security
  • Re-install the recent version of WordPress
  • Change password and user-ids for all the users
  • Check the themes and plug-ins are up-to-date

16. Explain Avatar and Gravatar in WordPress.

In online communications, the user’s profile picture is called an Avatar. A web-based service called Gravatar allows endusers to use the Avatar image.

17. Explain shortcodes. Give an example.

Shortcodes are placeholders that allow users to add dynamic content or functionality to their posts or pages by using a simple code. 

An example of a shortcode is [ gallery ] for displaying image galleries.

18. Explain the Child theme in WordPress. How to create a child theme?

The child theme is the parent theme’s extension. Any update will undo the changes if you change the main/parent theme. Using a child theme, the customizations are preserved on an update.

To create a child theme in WordPress, you have to create a new folder in the wp-content/themes directory, create a style.css file with specific information and a reference to the parent theme, and optionally create a “functions.php” file for additional customization.

19. Explain posts and pages in WordPress.

Posts allow to write a blog and post it on your website. They are listed in reverse chronological order on your blog’s front page.

Pages are different from posts. They are static. You can add pages that contain information about you and your site.

20. Differentiate between posts and pages in WordPress.

Posts in WordPress are typically used for blog entries or dynamic content displayed in reverse chronological order. Pages, however, are more suitable for static content like “About” or “Contact” pages that don’t need frequent updates.

21. How to display custom fields in WordPress?

To display custom fields in WordPress, you can use the get_post_meta() function to retrieve the value of a specific custom field. You can then echo or display it wherever you want it to appear.

22. How to secure your WordPress Website?

WordPress websites are secured by keeping the WordPress core, themes, and plugins up to date. This is done using strong passwords, limiting login attempts, and implementing.

23. Where is WordPress content stored?

Wp_posts is a table in the MySQL database that holds the WordPress content posts and pages. WordPress displays the content using dynamic PHP templates. It does not store a separate HTML file for every page. You can also find Pages in the wp_posts table in the database. These are accessed through phpMyAdmin.

24. Are deactivated plugins slow down WordPress sites?

No. Deactivated or inactive plugins do not slow down WordPress. Deactivating a WordPress plugin turns it off. Still, the plugin is installed on the website so that you can activate it again. Uninstalling a plugin removes it from the website completely. If there are deactivated plugins, they will be treated as if they didn’t exist. WordPress will load only the active plugins.

25. Explain loop.

A PHP code to display WordPress posts is called a loop or WordPress code. The themes in WordPress display posts using a loop on the website’s web pages. These loops contain functions that display the posts. 

The loop is one of the most important components of the WordPress code. It contains several template tags for publishing, formatting, and organizing post content. 

By default, the WordPress loop contains the following information for each post:

  • Title (the_title())
  • Time (the_time())
  • Categories (the_category()).

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

DBMS Interview Questions Power BI Interview Questions
Java Interview Questions JavaScript Interview Questions
CSS Interview Questions Flutter Interview Questions
HTML Interview Questions NodeJS Interview Questions
MySQL Interview Questions ReactJS Interview Questions
Python Interview Questions C Programming Interview Questions
OOPS Interview Questions Data Structure Interview Questions

26. In which cases WordPress is unsuitable for a website?

Some situations when WordPress is not recommended are:

  • Client is working on a non-CMS-based project
  • For sophisticated and innovative e-commerce sites
  • Sites that require custom scripting solutions

27. How can you edit and disable a WordPress comment?

To edit WordPress comments, use the dashboard. From the panel, under the Comments option, choose edit to edit a comment.

To disable the WordPress comment on the dashboard, on the panel, under the discussion option, you find “Allow people to post the comment.” Uncheck this to disable the comment.

28. Explain moderate comments in WordPress.

Visitors’ comments on a post aren’t published unless the admin provides it. It is called moderation. Select the Settings option from the dashboard to change the comment moderation setting and check the “Comment must be manually approved” option.

29. How will you allow only registered users to comment on WordPress?

Check the “Users must be registered and logged in to comment” option from Discussions under the Settings option if you don’t want a comment from a new user on your blog.

30. Explain categories in WordPress.

Categories in WordPress allow a user to divide its content into different sections. The topics published on a single website are then divided into groups. It informs readers what a post is about so they can easily find their content from a lot.

31. Explain tags in WordPress.

Tags help to group similar posts. This makes it comfortable for the users to search for a specific post. Although people find Tags the same as categories, they are still distinct.

32. How to convert a category into a tag?

WordPress allows the conversion of a category to a tag and vice versa. From the Import option in the Tools section, install Categories and Tag Converter to accomplish this.

33. Differentiate WordPress categories and tags.

Categories in WordPress are broad-ranging and help a user search for a blog. A post may have more than one category and must have at least one category.

WordPress Tags are like categories. They are used to define a post more specifically. Tags are not necessary for each post.

34. How many user types does WordPress have?

WordPress user role decides access permission to the users of a WordPress website.

  • Administrator: Have full rights over a site.
  • Editor: Deal with the website’s content section.
  • Author: Only deal with their posts and can delete them even after publishing.
  • Contributor: Has no right to publish their post or page. They send it to the administrator for review.
  • Subscriber: Users who are subscribed to the site can login and update their profile.
  • Follower: They don’t have any rights and only read and comment on the post.
  • Viewer: Can only read and comment on a post.

35. In which cases you cannot see the plugin menu?

You cannot see your plugin menu when the blog is hosted on free wordpress.com. This is because you cannot add plugins there.  Also, if you don’t have an account at an administrator level, your WordPress is not possible to see the plugin.

36. How to add a new menu in WordPress?

To add a new menu in WordPress, go to the WordPress dashboard, click Appearance in the sidebar, and then Menus. You can create a new menu from there, add menu items, and assign the menu to specific locations on your website.

37. How will you add an image gallery to a WordPress post or page?

The built-in gallery feature can add an image gallery to a WordPress post or page. To edit a page or post, click Add Media, select the images you want to include in the gallery, and click the Create Gallery button.

38. Explain permalinks in WordPress.

Permalinks in WordPress refer to the URL structure of individual posts, pages, or other content types. You can configure the permalink structure in the WordPress dashboard under Settings > Permalinks.

39. What is the purpose of WordPress’s wp_head(), wp_footer, and wp_query functions?

The wp_head() function outputs the HTML head section of a WordPress theme. This includes meta tags, stylesheets, and JavaScript files. 

The wp_footer() function outputs the closing body HTML tags and any scripts that need to be placed at the end of the page.

WordPress’s wp_query() function creates custom queries to retrieve posts or other content from the database. It provides flexibility in specifying parameters such as post type, taxonomy, and metadata.

40. Explain template tags. List a few of them.

Template tags in WordPress are used within themes to retrieve content from the database. It is a code that informs WordPress to get something from the database.

Some template tags to use in WordPress are:

  • get_header()
  • get_footer()
  • get_sidebar()
  • wp_login_url()
  • get_calendar()
  • allowed_tags()
  • the_author()
  • get_the_author()
  • wp_list_bookmarks()
  • get_bookmark()
  • the_category()
  • the_category_rss()
  • comment_author()
  • comment_author_email()
  • the_permalink()
  • user_trailingslashit()
  • permalink_anchor()
  • post_class()
  • post_password_required()
  • get_post_thumbnail_id()
  • the_post_thumbnail()
  • wp_nav_menu()
  • walk_nav_menu_tree(), etc

41. Differentiate between WordPress and Wix.

WordPress Wix
An open-source CMS) WordPress allows to create and publish content pages online. A simple and easy-to-use website builder, Wix builds your website from scratch with flexible designs. This makes it ideal for portfolio-style websites.
It may be intimidating since it does not hold your hand too much.  Getting started with Wix is a straightforward process. 
Offers only a few official themes on its website.  Wix offers multiple website templates. All of these are responsive, and its editor enables users to add their personal touches.
A WordPress user bears the brunt of securing the site. You need to stay on core top updates, watch out for several errors, choose the right host, and take care of everything else. Regarding security, Wix takes care of it all on its own. From the basics, such as selecting a strong password or using two-factor authentication. It is highly-secure because Wix is a closed system, and Wix’s team offers server maintenance and script updates.
Besides its knowledge base, WordPress doesn’t give any specialized support.   Wix provides both a comprehensive knowledge base and telephone support.

42. Explain importers in WordPress.

WordPress importer tools move content from an existing WordPress site to a new one. This tool can also move a site from localhost to an online server. Several data can be migrated using the WordPress importer. 

Few examples are:

  • Pages, posts, and other custom posts types
  • Custom fields and post-meta
  • Comments
  • Tags, Categories
  • Authors, etc.

43. Explain widgets in WordPress.

A WordPress widget adds specific content or features to a site. Website widgets can be added to numerous parts of a site, such as the sidebar footer or the other areas. 

Widgets allow to add features and functions to the site without requiring programming. It’s possible to add many widgets to your website, including menus, banner ads, calendars, popular posts,  and social icons.

44. What are WordPress themes? How to select a WordPress theme?

Using a WordPress theme, you can design the website’s layout and appearance in the front end.

WordPress theme should complement your site. It can be either free or paid. An ideal theme should have qualities like simplicity, responsiveness, support plugins, and SEO-friendly.

45. What is the difference between custom and normal themes?

Custom themes are easier to format. You don’t need much technical knowledge to change the coding part. Custom theme allows for SEO search. However, with an SEO plugin available, it doesn’t make much difference to a normal theme.

46. Differentiate between WordPress themes and plugins.

WordPress theme is an external effect of a site’s presentation and design. A plugin is an interior effect that adds or removes some functions to a website.

You can customize some functionality in themes rather than installing the plugin, but plugins can’t replace themes.

47. How will you create a multilingual website in WordPress?

You can create a multilingual website in WordPress using plugins like WPML (WordPress Multilingual Plugin) or Polylang. These plugins provide translation management and language-switching functionality.

48. Differentiate between static and a WordPress website.

A static website has fixed HTML pages that must be manually edited to make changes. On the contrary, a WordPress website is dynamic and allows content to be managed through a CMS, making it easier to update and add new content.

49. Explain the customizer in WordPress.

WordPress customizer customizes the user’s website’s appearance and functionality in real-time. It provides a user-friendly interface to change themes, widgets, menus, and other settings.

50. Explain the purpose of the wp_nav_menu() and do_shortcode functions in WordPress.

WordPress’s wp_nav_menu() function displays a navigation menu in a theme. It creates menus and assigns them to specific locations in your theme.

The do_shortcode() function in WordPress executes shortcodes programmatically. It dynamically generates and displays shortcode content within your theme’s template files or in other areas where shortcodes are not automatically parsed.

51. Explain meta tags.

Meta-tags are keywords and descriptions to display website or page information. These are snippets of HTML code that describe a website’s content or a particular webpage. Search engines use this data to determine what a page is about and provide the content that appears in search results. Meta tags provide the description displayed in search engine results that greatly contributes to improved CTRs (Click-Through Rates). 

The post Top 51 WordPress Interview Questions and Answers (2025) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>
Top 50 Power BI Interview Questions and Answers 2025 (With PDF) https://www.wscubetech.com/blog/power-bi-interview-questions/ Sat, 13 May 2023 07:53:39 +0000 http://www.wscubetech.com/blog/?p=2851 In 2011, Business Intelligence (BI) tools gained rapid popularity, posing a challenge for Microsoft. Hence, Microsoft introduced Power BI in 2013 as an independent tool to keep pace. It combines multiple Excel add-ons to deliver compelling analytical capabilities to existing MS Excel, making it smart enough to generate intuitive and interactive reports. Power BI has...

The post Top 50 Power BI Interview Questions and Answers 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>

In 2011, Business Intelligence (BI) tools gained rapid popularity, posing a challenge for Microsoft. Hence, Microsoft introduced Power BI in 2013 as an independent tool to keep pace. It combines multiple Excel add-ons to deliver compelling analytical capabilities to existing MS Excel, making it smart enough to generate intuitive and interactive reports. Power BI has contributed immensely to Microsoft’s growth in the BI domain and data visualisation. 

Microsoft Power BI is among the top business intelligence tools, and many leading IT companies rely on it for business analytics. Hence, increasing the demand for skilled and knowledgeable Power BI experts.

We understand that studying for a job interview can be challenging, especially when it’s a wide topic like business intelligence. If you are planning for a job interview in the BI domain, then you need to prepare diligently, seeking in-depth information about the topics often discussed in interview sessions. No worries, we have got you covered.

In this blog, we have shared the top 50 interview questions on Power BI. These questions are based on extensive research and survey after consulting experienced professionals from the data analytics and visualisation industry. This article is to help Power BI aspirants gain a better understanding of the domain and brush up on their basics so they can crack any interview. 

Upskill Yourself With Live Training

Full Stack Web Development Course WordPress Course
Front-End Development Course MERN Stack Course

So, let’s have a look at the top 50 Power BI interview questions and answers:

Power BI Interview Questions For Freshers

1. What is Power BI?

Power BI is a collection of business analytics tools, techniques, and processes used to turn raw business data into valuable and interactive information. Owned by Microsoft, it connects, transforms, and visualises data sets from multiple unrelated sources. 

The data can either be in the form of an Excel spreadsheet or on the cloud. Power BI makes it easier to connect data sources and share insights with anyone as it offers the right tools to create interactive dashboards and live reports that are shared across platforms to make informed decisions. With highly competitive and categorised information, involved parties can track their performances in the market. 

2. Why should we use Power BI?

Power BI is known for providing an easier way to connect, transform, and visualise raw data from different sources and convert it into meaningful and insightful business information to make informed and smart decisions. 

Even non-technical users can extract information from the data without much hassle. Power BI makes it cost-efficient for small businesses to visualise their data without maintaining a separate team of data analysts. In addition, it offers a secure cloud service to view dashboards or reports and share them with stakeholders and business partners for real-time analysis. 

Moreover, it comes with AI features in the form of Power Q&A and Power Query. The former allows you to analyse data through voice commands, while the latter enables you to create dashboards by typing in the columns and visuals you need to include. 

3. What are the main components of Power BI?

Here is a brief description of each Power BI component:

a) Power Pivot

It is used to fetch, clean, and load data on Power Query. Besides, it is used for data modelling that uses DAX (Data Analysis Expression) for calculations. Here, relationships between tables are created and users get values shown in Pivot Tables.

b) Power Query 

It is an important Power BI component that operates on the loaded data. It extracts data from various sources, such as SQL, Excel, Oracle, and Text/CSV files, transforms it, and even deletes it.

c) Power Q&A 

Allows users to interact with reports by providing answers to their questions. It works with Power View and provides answers through representations. 

d) Power View 

Used to provide an intuitive display of data via charts, maps, graphs, and other visuals and retrieve metadata for analysis. It offers an interactive view and slicers and filters are used for slicing and dicing data.

e) Power Map

Presents geo-spatial visualisation of data in 3D mode. It highlights accurate geographic locations of data based on state, city, continent, and address.

f) Power BI Desktop 

Integrates Power View, Power Query, and Power Pivot. It helps users create advanced queries, reports, data models, and dashboards and hone their BI skills for data analysis.

g) Power BI Mobile Application 

Available for iOS, Android, and Windows and has an interactive display of a dashboard that can be shared easily.

4. Can you tell the difference between Managed Enterprise BI and Self-service BI?

Following are the differences between Self-service BI and Managed Enterprise BI:

Managed Enterprise BI Self-service BI
Data flows from various sources, and there is no order for companies to ingest and manage their data sources. Companies can ingest data from any source seamlessly, and data can flow from any source in any format.
Companies find it hard to conduct business operations effectively as they are unable to report and analyse data and collaborate to gain valuable insights from it. Companies can process data and conduct business operations easily as data ingestion falls into order.
Analysing data is difficult due to time constraints and a lack of proper information. No time constraint, allows to analyse data implicitly and easily. 
Companies have to employ third-party vendors to make the most out of their data sources, resulting in straining their budgets and slow productivity. No third-party vendors are required, which eliminates other expenses and constraints.
Demands complex programming skills for generating reports. Even non-technical users can generate intuitive and actionable dashboards easily without executing complex programming codes.

Suggested Reading: OOPs Interview Questions 2025

5. What are the various Power BI versions?

Power BI has three versions:

a) Microsoft Power BI Free/Desktop 

For users who want to get business insights from data with visualisation.

b) Microsoft Power BI Pro

This full version of Power BI enables unlimited viewing, sharing, and reporting.

c) Microsoft Power BI Premium 

Rather than providing a per-user license, it offers a dedicated unit of capacity for all users in an organisation. 

6. What are the building blocks of Power BI?

Here are the building blocks of Power BI:

a) Visualisations 

Visual representation of raw data extracted from various sources. Examples are charts, line graphs, pie charts, maps, bar graphs, etc. 

b) Datasets 

A collection of data used to create reports and visualisations. It can be in the form of Excel sheets, Oracle, SQL, CSV files, etc.

c) Reports 

A collection of visualisations that appear together on single or multiple pages. Each visualisation shows specific aspects of the data depending on the requirements. Examples include profit by-products, sales by country, city, report, logistic performance report, etc.

d) Dashboards 

They are single-layer presentations with one or multiple visualisations embedded on one page. Dashboards can be shared across various platforms, such as Power BI Apps for live information. Examples are geographical maps, pie charts, and bar charts. 

e) Tiles

It is the single visualisation in a dashboard or report. Examples are pie charts, line graphs, or other visualisations in a report. 

7. What is Power BI Desktop?

Power BI Desktop is an open-source application developed by Microsoft. It can be installed on your computer and is used for generating, shaping, modelling, designing, and publishing reports to the cloud with interactive visualisations. 

Moreover, it works cohesively with the Power BI service, and you can save your work to a file or publish data to your Power BI site that can be shared with others. It is also used as an on-premise version of Power BI Desktop and works full-fledged even if the system is not connected to the internet. 

Users need the internet only when they want to publish their reports to the cloud and share them with colleagues. It is the first application that users jump into as soon as they board Power BI.

8. What are the essential applications of Power BI?

Power BI is used for various reasons by different professionals and departments:

a) Database Administrators

PowerShell or Microsoft 365 allows database administrators to increase the Power BI capacity, and they can assign their roles to different team members. Also, they can set new passwords and restrict access to reports or dashboards in Power BI. 

b) Project Management Office

Project managers use Power BI to determine the situation of several business units. They can see the performance of team members and track the progress of their projects.

c) IT Professionals

They use Power BI to create visualisations and dashboards that can track their performance and visualise log files for meetings. They can find the areas they need to work on and enhance their performance. 

d) Business and Data Analysts

They use Power BI to analyse the raw data efficiently and turn it into meaningful information by cleaning it based on specific requirements. Analysts can prepare live reports to represent raw data in the form of visual insights. 

e) Reports for Consumers

Users can add custom reports to different applications designed from consumers’ perspectives. You can create a report showing daily sales in different countries and add it to your social media websites, profiles, and applications. This will highlight your product’s popularity among consumers and motivate them to buy it.  

9. What are some drawbacks of using Power BI?

Here are a few drawbacks of Power BI:

a) Can’t Handle Large Data

Power BI is unable to handle files larger than 1 GB and might even time out while processing them. Also, it can’t mix imported data accessed through real-time connections.

b) Limited Data Sharing

Allows to share dashboards and reports with users on the same domain or have email addresses listed on Office 365. 

c) Limited Data Source

Real-time connection is allowed with a few or limited data sources. 

d) Complex in Nature

Its design is a bit complex, and users must be well-versed in Power BI before they start working on it. 

10. What is Self-service BI?

SSBI, or Self-service Business Intelligence, enables business professionals or users with no technical knowledge to filter, segment, analyse, and visualise their data and instantly generate intuitive and actionable reports or dashboards. 

It has simplified the process of accessing data and creating visuals to get meaningful insights. The best part is users don’t need technical expertise for data reporting. They can use available filters and data manipulation options to create dashboards and make informed decisions. Microsoft SSBI has two parts- Excel BI toolkit and Power BI.

Suggested Reading: SQL Interview Questions 2025

11. What are the key benefits of using Power BI?

Some of the significant advantages of Power BI are:

a) Custom Visualisation 

Users have the flexibility of creating custom visualisations and adding them to their reports and dashboards. With custom reports, decision-makers and planners can find the problem and make an informed decision to enhance their business performance. 

b) Easy to Use 

Power BI doesn’t need technical prowess to visualise data and create reports. Using its simple interface, even non-technical users can transform raw data into interactive reports. 

c) ETL/Data Recovery Suite 

It uses its robust set of tools to implement ETL ((extraction, transformation, and loading of the datasets) capabilities. Data transformation and preparation are critical stages before moving to the visualisation stage. Moreover, with Power BI, users can directly build reporting datamarts and eliminate any ambiguities in the datasets.

d) Affordable Price

Power BI is much more affordable than other BI and data visualisation tools, making it an ideal choice for small businesses. They can now use this effective tool for free to make informed and better business decisions to enhance their performance. Also, for a minimal amount, it offers an array of features.

e) Q&A Capability 

Power BI can execute natural language queries using Power Query and Power Q&A. Also, using the Natural Language Processing (NLP) algorithm, it processes commands of users to deliver the desired results. 

Other benefits of Power BI include:

  • It enables building interactable data visualisation in data centres.
  • Users can transform raw data into interactive visuals and share them with anyone.
  • Allows fast data analysis by establishing a connection for Excel queries and dashboards.
  • Gives quick and accurate solutions.
  • Allows users to perform queries using simple English words.

12. What is a dashboard in Power BI?

A Power BI dashboard is like a canvas, a single-layered presentation sheet that helps create a story through multiple visualisation reports. It includes all the highlights in the form of a one-page report, and users can understand the data better. 

Its main features are:

  • Users can drill through the page, selection pane, and bookmarks, create various tiles and integrate URLs.
  • It allows users to set the report layout to mobile view. 

13. Is Power BI an effective solution?

Power BI is a cloud-based BI tool used to analyse and visualise raw data collected from various sources. It integrates data visualisations with data analytics so that businesses can make informed and better decisions based on data. 

Power BI is easy to use, even for a non-technical person and processes data in an easy-to-understand and reliable way. It is compatible with different platforms and can be shared on the cloud, making it an effective solution.

14. What data sources can Power BI connect to?

The list of data sources that can be connected to Power BI is extensive, but we have categorised them into the following:

a) Files

Imports data from Power BI Desktop files (.pbix), Excel (.xlsx, .xlxm), and Comma-Separated Values (.csv). 

b) Content Packs

A collection of related files stored as a group. There are two types of content packs:

  • From service providers such as Salesforce, Google Analytics, and Marketo.
  • Created and shared by other users in an organisation. 

c) Connectors

Connects your databases and datasets, such as SQL, Azure, Server Analysis Services tabular data, etc. 

Suggested Reading: Flutter Interview Questions and Answers

15. What are the available formats of Power BI?

Available formats of Power BI are:

a) Power BI Desktop 

Download and install Power BI Desktop on your PC and connect to the data source and transform, analyse, and visualise data using templates.

b) Power BI Services 

A cloud-based service or SaaS (Software-as-a-service). You can connect to data, but modelling is limited.

c) Power BI Mobile App 

Users can access dashboards and reports securely on any device as it is compatible with iOS, Android, and Windows.

Interview Questions for You to Prepare for Jobs

DBMS Interview Questions Power BI Interview Questions
Java Interview Questions JavaScript Interview Questions
CSS Interview Questions Flutter Interview Questions
HTML Interview Questions NodeJS Interview Questions
MySQL Interview Questions ReactJS Interview Questions
Python Interview Questions C Programming Interview Questions
OOPS Interview Questions Data Structure Interview Questions

Power BI Developer Interview Questions (for Experienced)

16. Where do you reshape data in Power BI? 

Data is reshaped in Data Editing, which allows users to manipulate rows and columns of the data according to their requirements. 

17. How can you refresh data in PowerBI?

Data can be refreshed in Gateway by scheduling a refresh. 

18. What are custom visualisations?

Power BI allows users to create their visualisations using a library of custom visualisations. Start by creating a development project and then test the visual in Power BI services. 

After customising the visualisation, it is tested and checked thoroughly before sharing and saved as a .pbiviz file. However, one must be a Power BI Pro user to be able to customise visualisations. 

19. What are different refresh options in Power BI?

There are four key refresh options in Power BI, which are as follows:

a) Package Refresh

To synchronise the Power BI Desktop and Excel file between the Power BI service and OneDrive or SharePoint Online. But it doesn’t extract data from its original source, and the dataset is updated with what’s in the file within OneDrive. 

b) Model or Data Refresh

Refreshes the dataset with data collected from the original source using the scheduled refresh or refresh now option. It requires a gateway for on-premise data sources.

c) Tile Refresh

Once data changes, it updates the cache for tile visuals on the dashboard every 15 minutes. You can force a tile refresh by clicking on the ellipsis (…) on the upper right side of a dashboard and selecting Refresh Dashboard tiles.

d) Visual Container Refresh

Refreshes the visual container and updates the cached report visuals within a dashboard once the data is changed. 

20. What are the different views in Power BI Desktop?

There are different views in Power BI, each serving a specific purpose. Here is a brief explanation of these views:

a) Report View

It is the default view that allows users to add visualisations and multiple additional report pages and publish them on the portal.

b) Data View

To reshape data using Query Editor tools. Users can transform the data and create calculated columns for further insights.

c) Model View

It is also known as Relationship View, as it helps users manage relationships between complex datasets. Users can see all the data models in this view and compare or create diagrams according to the subsets of the model.

21. What is the difference between Power BI and Tableau?

Power BI and Tableau are data analytics and visualisation tools widely used in the IT sector. However, there are certain differences between the two:

Power BI Tableau
Power BI is qualified to handle a limited volume of datasets. Capable of handling a huge volume of data without affecting the performance of the system. It can fetch billions of rows. 
Doesn’t have wide access to data sources. Can access various data sources.
Power BI has a simple interface that helps users visualize data and create reports. The interface is comparatively difficult to understand, especially for a non-technical user.
Easy to use for both new and experienced users. Suitable for experienced professionals in data analytics. 
Embedding the reports is easier. Embedding reports in Tableau is a challenge.
Uses Data Analysis Expression (DAX) to create formulas for measuring the columns. Uses Multidimensional Expressions (MDX) to measure columns and dimensions.
Due to its limited capacity to handle large volumes of data, cloud support is difficult.  Can support the cloud easily.
Integrated with Microsoft Azure, which helps in data analysis. Has an in-built machine learning capability to perform various ML operations on datasets. 
More affordable compared to Tableau. Need to pay more when third-party apps are connected.

22. What is the difference between Power Query and Power Pivot?

Following are the main differences between Power Pivot and Power Query:

Power Query Power Pivot
Focuses on analysing data. Revolves around collecting and transforming data.
It is an ETL service tool. It is an in-memory data modelling component.

Suggested Reading: Angular Interview Questions and Answers

23. What is Get Data in Power BI?

Get Data connects you to different data sources to import data for analysis and visualisation. You can select from numerous data sources.

When you click on the Get Data option in Power BI, you can see a drop-down menu showing all data sources. You can directly ingest data from any source, including: 

  • Excel
  • SQL Server database
  • JSON
  • IBM
  • Impala
  • Access database
  • PDF
  • Text/CSV 
  • MySQL
  • SharePoint 
  • Oracle
  • and more. 

You can also get data from Azure and online sources. Moreover, Power BI data flows, and Power BI datasets are compatible.

24. What is the comprehensive working system of Power BI?

The working system of Power BI comprises four key steps:

a) Data Importing

Start by importing data, convert it into a standard format and store it in a staging area.

b) Data Cleaning 

Now that the data is cleaned, the next step is to transform or clean it to eliminate unwanted data. 

c) Data Visualisation 

Here, data is represented visually in the form of dashboards or reports using several powerful visualisation tools.

d) Save and Publish 

As the report is ready, it’s time to save and publish the reports and share them with other users via mobile apps or the web.

25. What are the different filters in Power BI Reports?

Power BI offers several options to filter reports, data, and visualisations. Some of them are:

a) Visual-level Filters 

They work on an individual visualisation and are applied to both data and calculation conditions. 

b) Page-level Filters 

They are used for a given page within a report made of multiple pages. You can apply different page-level filters to multiple pages in the same report. Also, each page in a report can have different filters applied to it.

c) Report-level Filters 

As they are used to apply filters to the entire report, affecting all pages and visualisations of a report, they are also known as generalised filters. 

As Power BI visual has an interaction feature, filtering a report is a breeze. Despite being quite useful visual interactions have certain drawbacks:

  • Filters are not saved as a part of a report. As you access a report, you can apply visual filters but can’t store them in the same report.
  • Any filter applied is visible, which is a major downside when you apply a filter to the entire report but don’t want any visual indication of it. 

26. What is Power Pivot?

Power Pivot is an add-in for Excel 2010, introduced to extend the analytical capabilities of Microsoft Excel. It allows users to import and mash up millions of data from various sources into a single Excel Workbook. 

You can manipulate and analyse data, draw conclusions, and share insights easily without impacting the speed of your computer. Moreover, it allows you to create calculated columns, measure using formulas, find relationships between heterogeneous data, and build PivotCharts and PivotTables. You can analyse data to make timely business decisions without any IT assistance.

27. What is Power Query?

Power Query is a BI tool designed by Microsoft for Excel. You can collect, clean, transform, and reshape data according to your requirements using an intuitive interface without coding. You need to write your query once and run it with a simple refresh. Power Query is helpful for users to

  • Import data from a range of sources, such as databases, files, social media, Big data, etc. 
  • Combine data from multiple sources.
  • Shape data, add or remove, to meet your requirements. 

28. What is Power View?

Power View is a data visualisation technology used for the interactive display of data using charts, graphs, maps, and other visuals that can make data more intuitive. This option is available in SQL Server, Excel, Power BI, and SharePoint. 

Here are the visualisation options available in Power View:

  • Charts
  • Pie charts 
  • Maps 
  • Line charts 
  • Tiles 
  • Tables
  • Power View
  • Cards 
  • Images
  • Multiples Visualisations 
  • Bubble and scatter charts 
  • Key performance indicators (KPIs)

29. Differentiate between Power BI and Excel.

The main differences between the Power BI and MS Excel include:

Parameter Power BI Excel
Tabular Reports Power BI is not a great option for handling tabular reports. Excel handles tabular reports better than Power BI.
Reports You can create interactive and personalized reports. Users can’t perform advanced cross-filtering between charts.
Analytics Has simple analytics. Has advanced analytics.
Duplicate Table Can’t display duplicate tables. Users can display duplicate tables.
Applications Perfect for KPIs, alerts, and dashboards. Excel has new charts, but they can’t connect to the data model.

30. What are content packs in Power BI?

Content packs are a pre-built collection of visualisations and Power BI reports for your chosen services to enhance the Power BI experience. A subscriber to chosen services can connect to Power BI by logging in to their account and see their data through readymade live dashboards and interactive reports. Users can use content packs whenever they want rather than creating reports from scratch. 

Microsoft has introduced content packs for various services, including: 

  • Adobe Analytics 
  • SQL Sentry
  • Marketo 
  • CircuitID 
  • Salesforce 
  • Quickbooks Online
  • tyGraph
  • Azure Mobile Engagement 

With organisational content packs, users, system integrators, and BI professionals get tools to create their content packs and share purpose-built reports, dashboards, and datasets with others in the organisation. By connecting a content pack on the Powerbi.com portal, users can merge report items into a workspace list. 

The notable features of content packs are:

  • Access to specific groups or an entire organisation.
  • It can be customised so users can select the right pack.
  • Users with access to the content pack can create new reports or dashboards from the content. 

Power BI Dax Interview Questions

31. What is DAX?

Data Analysis Expressions (DAX) is a collection of operators, functions, and constants used in formulas to perform basic calculations and data analysis in Power Pivot. It is a formula language that helps you collect meaningful information from the available data. Moreover, DAX works on column values and is used to compute calculated columns, fields, and measures. However, it can’t be used to modify or insert data or calculate rows.

DAX Syntax:

Total Sales = SUM(Sales[SalesAmount])

Total Sales- Measure

SUM- DAX Function

Sales[SalesAmount]- Referenced table and the referenced column name.

Benefits of using variables in DAX:

  • As variables can be reused in DAX queries, there is no need for additional queries of the source database.
  • With variables, DAX expressions become understandable.

32. What are the three fundamental concepts of DAX?

a) Syntax

It is the way a formula is written, referring to the elements included in it. If the Syntax is wrong, you get an error message. 

b) Functions

They are the arguments or specific values written in a particular order to perform a calculation, the same as the function in Excel. It includes date/time, information, statistical, mathematical, logical, text, parent/child, etc. 

c) Context

It is of two types- Row Context and Filter Context. The former is used when a formula has a function to apply filters to find a row in a table while the latter is used when more than one filter is applied in a calculation to find a value. 

33. What are the most common DAX Functions used?

The most commonly-used DAX functions are:

  • SUM, AVG, MIN, MAX, COUNTROWS, DISTINCTCOUNT
  • IF, AND, OR, SWITCH
  • VALUES, ALL, FILTER, CALCULATE,
  • UNION, INTERSECT, EXCEPT, NATURALINNERJOIN, NATURALLEFTEROUTERJOIN,
  • ISBLANK, ISFILTERED, ISCROSSFILTERED
  • SUMMARIZECOLUMNS, ISEMPTY,
  • VAR (Variables)
  • GEOMEAN, MEDIAN, DATEDIFF

34. What is the CALCULATE function in DAX?

The CALCULATE function is used to find the sum of an entire column from a table and can be modified with filters. It is the only function to let users modify the filter context of tables or measures. 

Syntax:

CALCULATE ( [ <Expression> [, <Filter> [, <Filter> [, … ]]] )

Expression: That needs to be evaluated.

Filter: A boolean or table expression defining a filter.

Suggested Reading: DBMS Interview Questions and Answers

Power BI Advanced Interview Questions

35. How to perform query tasks on the Power BI desktop?

To perform a query, you need to use the Power Query option on the Power BI Desktop through the Power Query Editor. You can open it by going to the Edit Queries from the Home tab.

36. How do you create a group in Power BI?

Select all the fields you want to add to the group, right click on them, and click on the Context menu. After that, select the Group option, and Power BI will create a group of the selected items automatically. 

37. What is row-level security?

Row-level Security (RLS) is restricts data access and view for a user. Filters limit data access at the row level, and users can define filter rules and roles in Power BI Desktop and publish them to Power BI Service to configure row-level security. 

Users with access to a workspace can also access datasets in the same workspace. RLS simply restricts access to data for users with Viewer permission and doesn’t apply to Members, Admins, or Contributors.

The function username () is used with table relationships to limit data to current users. To enable low-level security, you need a Power BI Pro subscription. 

38. How are relationships defined in Power BI Desktop?

Relationships between tables in Power BI Desktop are defined in two ways: 

Manually

Relationships are defined manually using primary and foreign keys.

Automatic

When the Automatic feature is enabled, it identifies relationships between tables and defines them automatically.

39. Define bidirectional cross-filtering.

Bidirectional cross-filtering makes data modellers’ jobs easier and hassle-free. It lets data modellers decide how their Power BI Desktop filters will flow using relationships between tables. 

The filter context is transmitted to the second related table on the other side of a table relationship. This enables data modellers to solve many-to-many problems without writing complex DAX formulas. 

40. What is Advanced Editor in Power BI?

Advanced Editor is used to see queries that Power BI runs against the data source to import data. These queries are rendered in M-code, which is the Power Query Formula Language. To view the query code, users need to select Edit Queries from the Home tab and click on Advanced Editor from Home or View tab, to work on the query. 

The Advanced Editor window will display the code for the selected query. Any changes made to the data in Query Editor are saved to Applied Steps in the Query Setting. 

41. What are query parameters and Power BI templates?

Query parameters are used to provide users with a local Power BI Desktop report with a prompt so they can specify the values they want.

  • The query and calculations can use parameter selection.
  • Users can export PBIX files as Templates.
  • These Templates include everything in the PBIX except data.

Through parameters and templates, it is possible to share or email small template files and restrict the amount of data loaded in a local PBIX file, which enhances the processing experience. 

42. Why do users need Power Query when Power Pivot can import data from mostly used sources?

Power Query is a self-service ETL (Export, Transform, Load) tool that allows users to pull data from different sources, manipulate it based on their requirements, and load it into Excel. 

It runs as an Excel add-in. Users prefer Power Query over Power Pivot as they can easily load data and manipulate it into any form according to their requirements while loading. 

43. What is Power Map?

Power Map is another Excel add-in that offers a powerful set of tools to help users visualise and gain insights into a huge set of data with a geo-coded component. 

Users can produce 3D visualisations by plotting a million data points in the form of heat, column, and bubble maps on top of a Bing map. In case data is time stamped, it can create interactive views displaying how the data changes over time and space. 

44. What are the primary requirements for a table to be used in Power Map?

To be consumed in Power Map, data location is a must, like:

  • Latitude/Longitude pair
  • Street, City, Country/Region, Zip /Postal Code, and State/Province, geolocated by Bing

The table must contain unique rows, and location data can be in the form of a Latitude/Longitude pair, but that is not mandatory. 

45. What are many-to-many relationships, and how can they be addressed in Power BI?

Many-to-many relationships comprise a bridge table showing the combinations of two dimensions. These combinations can either be possible or those that have occurred.

  • Bi-directional cross-filtering relationships can be used in PBIX.
  • DAX is used per metric to check or modify filter context.
  • CROSSFILTER is used in Power Pivot in Excel.

46. What is the difference between a Power BI Dataset, a Report, and a Dashboard?

Power BI Dataset Report Dashboard
The source to create reports and visuals or tiles. An individual Power BI Desktop (PBIX) file comprises one or more report pages. A collection of visuals or tiles from various reports and pinned (optional).
A Data model in an Analysis Service Server Data can be inside the model (imported) or Direct Query connection to the source. Built for interactive and in-depth dataset analysis (formatting, filters). Each report is connected to at least one dataset and each page contains one or more visuals. Built to get aggregate primary visuals and metrics from different datasets.

47. What is the difference between Calculated Columns, Calculated Tables, and Measures?

Calculated Columns Calculated Tables Measures
They are added to tables through the DAX formula applied to the existing data. They are created by applying a DAX formula to define values. They use DAX functions for complex calculations. 
DAX formula is used to define values in new columns instead of querying data sources. Created in Report and Data views. Highlights running totals, sales forecasting, comparing sales, etc.
Useful when data sources don’t represent data in the desired format. Used for intermediate calculations and the data users want to store in the model. Useful when you want to aggregate your data or need up-to-the-minute calculations.

48. What are the ways to leverage Excel experience with Power BI?

Here are a few ways to use Excel experience with Power BI:

  • The Power BI Publisher for Excel can be used to 
  • Pin Excel items, such as tables, charts, ranges, to Power BI Service.
  • Connect to reports and datasets stored in Power BI Service.
  • You can use Excel workbooks to create a report in Power BI by exploring models in Excel tables.
  • Excel reports can be shared in the Power BI Service via Content Packs.
  • Excel workbook’s Power Pivot can be imported to Power BI Desktop models, saving time and effort.
  • Upload the Excel workbook in Power BI and view it on a browser, Power BI app, and Power BI Desktop.

49. What is the common table function for grouping data?

The common table function to group data is SUMMARIZE(). It is the primary groupby function in SSAS, and it is recommended to specify tables and columns rather than metrics. You can use the ADDCOLUMNS function. 

SUMMARIZECOLUMNS

It is a more efficient and new group by function in SSAS and Power BI Desktop. Make sure to specify groups by expressions, columns, and table.

50. What are the data management gateway and Power BI personal gateway?

Gateway is used to bridge the gap between on-premise data sources and Azure cloud services. 

i) Personal Gateway

Import and Power BI Service only and no central monitoring. Also, it can be used only by one person and others are not allowed to use this gateway.

II) On-Premises Gateway

Supports Import and Direct Query and monitors centrally. There can be multiple users of the gateway to develop content. 

Power BI Interview Questions and Answers 2025 Download Free

Conclusion

We hope that this article on Power BI questions will help you revise all the key topics and prepare better for your upcoming interview. 

If you want to build a promising career in BI and seek professional training, join our certification course, where experienced instructors will train you and enhance your skills and knowledge. Feel free to connect with our team now to seek further information and enrol in our course to get a step closer to your dream job and successful career. 

The post Top 50 Power BI Interview Questions and Answers 2025 (With PDF) appeared first on WsCube Tech Blog.

]]>